JP7504656B2 - Slot Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine in which a predetermined winning combination can be achieved depending on the display results of a variable display section that can variably display multiple types of identifiable identification information.

For this type of slot machine, there are several timings for notifying the player that they have won an internal bonus (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-28303 A

As with the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in terms of enhancing the presentation effect in relation to a configuration that can notify the player that a bonus has been awarded at one of multiple timings.

The present invention aims to provide a slot machine with improvements in relation to notification that a special benefit has been awarded.

The slot machine of claim 1 comprises:
A variable display unit is provided that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified,
A slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
A reward grant decision means for deciding whether or not to grant a reward;
a bonus award notification means for performing a bonus award notification to notify the player that the bonus will be awarded from the start of a specific game after at least one game has been played since the game in which it has been determined that the bonus will be awarded, until the start of a next game after the end of the specific game ;
Equipped with
After it is determined that the bonus is to be awarded, the presentation control up to the specific game includes a first presentation control and a second presentation control,
the notification control for performing the bonus award notification includes a post-end notification control for performing the bonus award notification after the end of the specific game, and a pre-end notification control for performing the bonus award notification before the end of the specific game,
The present invention is characterized in that the ratio at which the pre-end notification control is performed among the post-end notification control and the pre-end notification control differs between when the first performance control is performed and when the second performance control is performed.
According to this feature, after it is decided that a bonus will be awarded, the fact that the bonus will be awarded is announced at an appropriate timing according to the presentation control up to the specific game in which the bonus award announcement is made, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a slot machine. 13 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lottery targets of the internal lottery. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a navigation target role. 13 is a diagram for explaining the probability of winning a small prize in a normal gaming state and a special gaming state. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the control content of a main process performed by a main control unit. A diagram showing the flow of play in the normal zone and the advantageous zone. This is a diagram to explain the navigation notification (navigation performance) and lottery that are executed in each advantageous zone state. A diagram to explain the control of each advantageous zone state and the corresponding presentation state. A diagram to explain the control of each advantageous zone state and the corresponding presentation state. A diagram to explain the control of each advantageous zone state and the corresponding presentation state. A diagram to explain the control of each advantageous zone state and the corresponding presentation state. A diagram to explain the control of each advantageous zone state and the corresponding presentation state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the effects related to signs of increased winning percentage. This is a diagram to explain the scenario presentation among the winning rate increase premonition presentations. This is a diagram to explain the scenario presentation among the winning rate increase premonition presentations. This is a diagram to explain the scenario presentation among the winning rate increase premonition presentations. This is a diagram to explain the scenario presentation among the winning rate increase premonition presentations. This is a diagram to explain the scenario presentation among the winning rate increase premonition presentations. This is a diagram to explain the scenario presentation among the winning rate increase premonition presentations. This is a diagram to explain a specific effect among the winning rate increase premonition effects. A figure to explain each effect executed in the winning rate increase premonition effect. A figure to explain each effect executed in the winning rate increase premonition effect. A figure to explain each effect executed in the winning rate increase premonition effect. This is a diagram to explain the selection rate of the scenario presentation pattern among the winning rate increase premonition presentations. This is a diagram to explain the selection rate of a specific presentation pattern among the winning rate increase premonition presentations. This is a diagram to explain the CZ/AT premonition effects. This is a diagram to explain the roulette part of the selection effect in the CZ/AT premonition effect. This is a diagram to explain the effects and selection parts that can be executed in the selection effects in the CZ/AT premonition effects. This is a diagram to explain the presentation patterns of the selection presentation in the CZ/AT premonition presentation. This is a diagram to explain the selection rate of the selection effect pattern in the CZ/AT premonition effect. This is a diagram to explain the selection rate of the selection effect pattern in the CZ/AT premonition effect. A figure to explain a modified example of the roulette part of the selection effect in the CZ/AT premonition effect. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining the output status of the 100-coin signal and the transition of the acquired number display. 13 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a medal counter updating process. 13 is a flowchart showing the control content of a 100-sheet signal output process. A diagram to explain the switching of the display of the number of acquired coins in the AT state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a first form of control regarding the granting of a privilege in an ED state. A diagram to explain the setting suggestion presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a second form of control regarding the granting of a privilege in the ED state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a third form of control regarding the granting of a privilege in the ED state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a fourth form of control regarding the granting of a privilege in the ED state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a fifth form of control regarding the granting of a privilege in the ED state.

The following describes the form for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention based on the examples.

[Form 1]
The slot machine of form 1-1 is,
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A bonus granting decision means (a lottery for changing to an increased win rate) for deciding whether or not to grant a bonus (increased win rate);
a bonus notification means for performing a bonus notification (a performance result indicating that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted) for notifying the player that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted in a specific game (a final game of the winning rate increase precursor) that is at least one game after the game in which it has been determined that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted;
Equipped with
After it is determined that the bonus (increased winning percentage) will be awarded, the presentation control up to the specific game (the final game of the winning percentage increase premonition) includes a first presentation control (control for displaying the winning percentage increase notice 5 games after the start of the winning percentage increase premonition presentation, and control for executing the winning percentage increase premonition presentation with a night background image) and a second presentation control (control for displaying the winning percentage increase notice 4 games after the start of the winning percentage increase premonition presentation, and control for executing the winning percentage increase premonition presentation with a day background image),
The notification control for performing the bonus award notification (presentation result indicating that the winning percentage will be increased) includes a post-end notification control for performing the bonus award notification after the end of the specific game (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the winning percentage will be increased by using the third stop operation or later in the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor), and a pre-end notification control for performing the bonus award notification before the end of the specific game (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the winning percentage will be increased by using the first stop operation or later in the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor).
The rate at which the pre-end notification control (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the win rate will be increased in response to the first stop operation in the final game of the win rate increase premonition) is performed out of the end notification control and the pre-end notification control is different between a case where the first presentation control (control for displaying a win rate increase notification five games after the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation, control for executing the win rate increase premonition presentation with a night background image) is performed and a case where the second presentation control (control for displaying a win rate increase notification four games after the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation, control for executing the win rate increase premonition presentation with a daytime background image) is performed.
According to this feature, after it is decided that a bonus will be awarded, the fact that the bonus will be awarded is announced at an appropriate timing according to the presentation control up to the specific game in which the bonus award announcement is made, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The slot machine of aspect 1-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-1,
A display means (liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
The first effect control is an effect control for displaying a special background image (night background image) on the display means (liquid crystal display 51) that is different from the background image before it is determined that the bonus (increased winning rate) is to be awarded,
The second performance control is a performance control for displaying, on the display means (liquid crystal display 51), a background image (daytime background image) that is the same as the background image before the decision to grant the privilege is made,
The present invention is characterized in that, of the end notification control and the pre-end notification control, the rate at which the pre-end notification control (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the win rate will be increased in the final game of a win rate increase premonition triggered by a first stop operation) is performed is higher when the second presentation control (control for executing a win rate increase premonition presentation with a daytime background image) is performed than when the first presentation control (control for executing a win rate increase premonition presentation with a nighttime background image) is performed.
According to this feature, it is easier to notify the fact that a bonus will be awarded before the end of a specific game when a background image that is the same as the background image before it is decided that a bonus will be awarded is displayed than when a special background image different from the background image before it is decided that a bonus will be awarded is displayed, thereby increasing the sense of surprise when the notification is made.

The slot machine of aspect 1-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 1-1 or 1-2,
The first effect control is an effect control in which the number of games from the game in which it has been determined that the bonus (increased winning percentage) will be awarded to the specific game (the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor) is a predetermined number of games (five games) or more,
The second presentation control is a presentation control in which the number of games from the game in which it has been determined that the bonus (increased winning percentage) will be awarded to the specific game (the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor) is less than a predetermined number of games (four games),
The present invention is characterized in that, of the end notification control and the pre-end notification control, the rate at which the pre-end notification control (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the win rate will be controlled to increase in response to the first stop operation in the final game of the win rate increase premonition) is performed is higher when the second presentation control (control for displaying the win rate increase notification four games after the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation) is performed than when the first presentation control (control for displaying the win rate increase notification five games after the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation) is performed.
According to this feature, when a notification is given that a bonus will be awarded when the number of games played is less than a predetermined number from the game for which it has been determined that a bonus will be awarded, the notification is likely to be given before the end of a specific game, thereby increasing the sense of surprise when the notification is made.

The slot machine of aspect 1-4 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a decision suggestion control means capable of performing decision suggestion control (a winning rate increase transition suggestion presentation, stopping of a pattern combination of a weak chance replay and a strong chance replay) which suggests that it has been decided whether or not to grant the bonus (increased winning rate) in a game in which it has been decided whether or not to grant the bonus.
According to this feature, the decision suggestion control suggests that a decision has been made as to whether or not to award a bonus, so that the player can expect to be notified that a bonus will be awarded in a specific subsequent game.

The slot machine of aspect 1-5 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-4,
When the post-end notification control (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that control will be exercised to increase the winning percentage in the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor in response to the third stop operation or subsequent operations) is performed, the device is characterized in that it is provided with a specific presentation execution means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a specific presentation in the specific game (the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor).
According to this feature, it is possible to anticipate that a special effect will be executed, thereby informing the player that a special benefit will be awarded in the game.

[Form 2]
The slot machine of type 2-1 is
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A bonus granting decision means (a lottery for changing to an increased win rate) for deciding whether or not to grant a bonus (increased win rate);
a bonus notification means for performing a bonus notification (a performance result indicating that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted) for notifying the player that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted in a specific game (a final game of the winning rate increase precursor) that is at least one game after the game in which it has been determined that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted;
Equipped with
After it is determined that the bonus (increased winning percentage) will be awarded, the presentation control up to the specific game (the final game of the winning percentage increase premonition) includes a first presentation control (control for displaying the winning percentage increase notice 5 games after the start of the winning percentage increase premonition presentation, and control for executing the winning percentage increase premonition presentation with a night background image) and a second presentation control (control for displaying the winning percentage increase notice 4 games after the start of the winning percentage increase premonition presentation, and control for executing the winning percentage increase premonition presentation with a day background image),
The notification control for making the bonus award notification (presentation result indicating that the win rate will be increased) includes a specific trigger notification control for making the bonus award notification triggered by a specific operation different from the game progress operation for progressing the game (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the win rate will be increased by a presentation operation in the final game of the win rate increase sign), and a progress trigger notification control for making the bonus award notification triggered by the game progress operation (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the win rate will be increased by a first stop operation or a third stop operation in the final game of the win rate increase sign).
The specific trigger notification control and the progress trigger notification control are characterized in that the rate at which the specific trigger notification control (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the win rate will be controlled to increase as a result of a presentation operation in the final game of the win rate increase premonition) is performed differs between a case in which the first presentation control (control for displaying a win rate increase announcement 5 games after the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation, control for executing the win rate increase premonition presentation with a night background image) is performed and a case in which the second presentation control (control for displaying a win rate increase announcement 4 games after the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation, control for executing the win rate increase premonition presentation with a daytime background image) is performed.
According to this feature, after it is decided that a bonus will be awarded, the fact that the bonus will be awarded is announced at an appropriate timing according to the presentation control up to the specific game in which the bonus award announcement is made, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The slot machine of aspect 2-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 2-1,
A display means (liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
The first effect control is an effect control for displaying a special background image (night background image) on the display means (liquid crystal display 51) that is different from the background image before it is determined that the bonus (increased winning rate) is to be awarded,
The second performance control is a performance control for displaying, on the display means (liquid crystal display 51), a background image (daytime background image) that is the same as the background image before the decision to grant the privilege is made,
The specific trigger notification control and the progress trigger notification control are characterized in that the rate at which the specific trigger notification control (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the win rate will be controlled to increase in response to a presentation operation in the final game of a win rate increase premonition) is performed is higher when the second presentation control (control for executing a win rate increase premonition presentation with a daytime background image) is performed than when the first presentation control (control for executing a win rate increase premonition presentation with a nighttime background image) is performed.
According to this feature, it is easier to be notified that a bonus will be awarded as the game progresses and a specific operation other than a game progression operation is initiated when a background image that is the same as the background image before the decision to award a bonus is displayed than when a special background image different from the background image before the decision to award a bonus is displayed, thereby increasing the sense of surprise when the notification is made.

The slot machine of aspect 2-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 2-1 or 2-2,
The first effect control is an effect control in which the number of games from the game in which it has been determined that the bonus (increased winning percentage) will be awarded to the specific game (the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor) is a predetermined number of games (five games) or more,
The second presentation control is a presentation control in which the number of games from the game in which it has been determined that the bonus (increased winning percentage) will be awarded to the specific game (the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor) is less than a predetermined number of games (four games),
The specific trigger notification control and the progress trigger notification control are characterized in that the rate at which the specific trigger notification control (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that the win rate will be controlled to increase as a result of a presentation operation in the final game of the win rate increase premonition) is performed is higher when the second presentation control (control for displaying a win rate increase notification four games after the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation) is performed than when the first presentation control (control for displaying a win rate increase notification five games after the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation).
According to this feature, when a notification is issued that a bonus will be awarded in a number of games less than a predetermined number from the game for which it has been determined that a bonus will be awarded, the notification that a bonus will be awarded is more likely to be triggered by a specific operation, thereby increasing the sense of surprise when the notification is made.

The slot machine of aspect 2-4 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-3,
The present invention is characterized by comprising a decision suggestion control means capable of performing decision suggestion control (a winning rate increase transition suggestion presentation, stopping of a pattern combination of a weak chance replay and a strong chance replay) which suggests that it has been decided whether or not to grant the bonus (increased winning rate) in a game in which it has been decided whether or not to grant the bonus.
According to this feature, the decision suggestion control suggests that a decision has been made as to whether or not to award a bonus, so that the player can expect to be notified that a bonus will be awarded in a specific subsequent game.

The slot machine of aspect 2-5 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 2-1 to 2-4,
When the specific trigger notification control (control for displaying a presentation result indicating that control will be exercised to increase the winning percentage in the final game of a winning percentage increase precursor) is performed, the device is characterized in that it is provided with a specific presentation execution means (sub-control unit 91) for executing a specific presentation in the specific game (the final game of a winning percentage increase precursor).
According to this feature, when the special effect is executed, the player can expect to be notified that a special benefit will be awarded in the game.

[Form 3]
The slot machine of form 3-1 is as follows:
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A bonus granting decision means (a lottery for changing to increased winning rate) for deciding whether or not to grant a bonus (increased winning rate);
a bonus notification means for performing a bonus notification (a performance result indicating that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted) for notifying a player that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted in a specific game (a final game of the winning rate increase precursor) after a number of games have been played since the game in which it was determined that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted;
Equipped with
The performances that take place during one game are as follows:
A first specific suggestion effect that displays a suggestion image (chance logo A, B, small role announcement) at a specific timing (operation after the third stop operation) after executing a first type of performance (performance A);
After executing the second type of performance (performance B), a second specific suggestion performance is displayed at the specific timing (operation after the third stop operation) to display a suggestion image (chance logo A, B, small role announcement);
A first special suggestion effect that displays a suggestion image (chance logo A, B, small role announcement) at a special timing (first stop operation) after executing the first type of effect (effect A);
A second special suggestion effect that displays a suggestion image (chance logo A, B, small role announcement) at the special timing (first stop operation) after executing the second type of effect (effect B);
Including,
After it has been decided that the benefit (increased win rate) will be granted, premonition control (a scenario including a presentation pattern that executes presentation A three or more times) can be executed to highly likely execute the first specific suggestion presentation and the first special suggestion presentation (a presentation pattern in which presentation A is executed) among the first specific suggestion presentation, the second specific suggestion presentation, the first special suggestion presentation, and the second special suggestion presentation in multiple games up to the specific game (the final game in which the premonition of increased win rate is executed).
According to this feature, after it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded, in multiple games up to the specific game in which the bonus award notification is made, the first type of presentation is executed, and then a presentation in which a suggestive image is displayed occurs frequently, thereby creating anticipation that a bonus has been awarded.

The slot machine of aspect 3-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 3-1,
After it has been decided that the benefit (increased win rate) will be granted, premonition control (a scenario including a presentation pattern that executes presentation B three or more times) can be executed to highly likely execute the second specific suggestion presentation and the second special suggestion presentation (a presentation pattern in which presentation B is executed) among the first specific suggestion presentation, the second specific suggestion presentation, the first special suggestion presentation, and the second special suggestion presentation in multiple games up to the specific game (the final game in which the premonition of increased win rate is executed).
According to this feature, after it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded, in multiple games up to the specific game in which the bonus award notification is made, the second type of presentation is executed, and then the presentation in which a suggestive image is displayed occurs frequently, thereby creating anticipation that a bonus has been awarded.

The slot machine of aspect 3-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 3-1 or 3-2,
The first type of effect (effect A) and the second type of effect (effect B) each include a plurality of types of aspects (effect A1, effect A2/effect B1, effect B2),
When the first type of presentation (presentation A) is executed and when the second type of presentation (presentation B) is executed, the ratio of the types of presentations executed differs depending on whether or not the bonus award notification (presentation result indicating control to increase the winning rate) is performed in the specific game (the final game of the prelude to an increase in the winning rate).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the manner in which the first type of effect or the second type of effect is executed.

The slot machine of aspect 3-4 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-3,
The first type of effect (effect A) and the second type of effect (effect B) are both characterized in that they are effects that start based on the start operation of the game.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the type of effect that is executed when the game starts through the game start operation.

The slot machine of aspect 3-5 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-4,
The first type of performance (performance A) and the second type of performance (performance B) are characterized in that they are performed by switching a performance image including the background (background image) of the display area from the performance image before the performance is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the first type of effect or the second type of effect has been executed.

The slot machine of aspect 3-6 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 3-1 to 3-5,
The feature of this invention is that the same type of effect is prevented from being executed consecutively during the period other than the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate, false premonition of increased win rate) after it has been decided whether or not to grant the special benefit (increased win rate).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a period other than the premonition period after it has been determined whether or not to grant a privilege from being mistaken for a premonition period.

[Form 4]
The slot machine of form 4-1 is,
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A bonus granting decision means (a lottery for changing to an increased win rate) for deciding whether or not to grant a bonus (increased win rate);
a bonus notification means for performing a bonus notification (a performance result indicating that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted) for notifying a player that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted in a specific game (a final game of the winning rate increase precursor) after a number of games have been played since the game in which it was determined that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted;
Equipped with
The performances that take place during one game are as follows:
A first specific suggestion effect that displays a suggestion image (chance logo A, B, small role announcement) at a specific timing (operation after the third stop operation) after executing a first type of performance (performance A);
After executing the second type of performance (performance B), a second specific suggestion performance is displayed at the specific timing (operation after the third stop operation) to display a suggestion image (chance logo A, B, small role announcement);
A first special suggestion effect that displays a suggestion image (chance logo A, B, small role announcement) at a special timing (first stop operation) after executing the first type of effect (effect A);
A second special suggestion effect that displays a suggestion image (chance logo A, B, small role announcement) at the special timing (first stop operation) after executing the second type of effect (effect B);
Including,
After it has been decided that the benefit (increased win rate) will be granted, premonition control (a scenario including three or more presentation patterns in which the presentation result is displayed in response to an operation after the third stop operation) can be executed to highly probabilistically produce the first specific suggestion effect and the second specific suggestion effect (presentation patterns in which the presentation result is displayed in response to an operation after the third stop operation) among the first specific suggestion effect, the second specific suggestion effect, the first special suggestion effect, and the second special suggestion effect in multiple games up to the specific game (the final game in which the premonition of increased win rate is produced).
According to this feature, after it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded, in multiple games leading up to the specific game in which the bonus award is notified, a first type of presentation or a second type of presentation is executed, and then a presentation in which a suggestive image is displayed at a specific timing occurs frequently, thereby creating anticipation that a bonus has been awarded.

The slot machine of aspect 4-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 4-1,
After it has been decided that the benefit (increased win rate) will be granted, premonition control (a scenario including three or more presentation patterns in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a first stop operation) can be executed to produce the first special suggestion effect and the second special suggestion effect (a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a first stop operation) with a high probability among the first specific suggestion effect, the second specific suggestion effect, the first special suggestion effect, and the second special suggestion effect in multiple games up to the specific game (the final game in which the premonition of increased win rate is displayed).
According to this feature, after it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded, in multiple games leading up to the specific game in which the bonus award notification is made, a first type of presentation or a second type of presentation is executed, and then a presentation in which a suggestive image is displayed at a special timing occurs frequently, thereby creating anticipation that a bonus has been awarded.

The slot machine of aspect 4-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 4-1 or 4-2,
The specific timing is based on a specific operation by the player (the third stop operation or subsequent operations),
The special timing is characterized in that it is based on a special operation (first stop operation) by the player.
According to this feature, the timing at which the suggestive image is displayed is based on the operation by the player, so that the difference in the timing at which the suggestive image is displayed is easy to sense.

The slot machine of aspect 4-4 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 4-1 to 4-3,
a pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result that is permitted to be derived before the display result is derived;
The suggestion image is characterized in that it includes an acceptable suggestion image (small winnings announcement) that suggests the result of the decision made by the advance decision means.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize a display result that is permitted to be derived from a suggestive image displayed after the first type of presentation or the second type of presentation.

The slot machine of aspect 4-5 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 4-1 to 4-4,
The first type of effect (effect A) and the second type of effect (effect B) are both characterized in that they are effects that start based on the start operation of the game.
According to this feature, the first type of effect and the second type of effect both start at the same timing, so that the difference in timing at which the subsequent suggestive images are displayed can be accentuated.

The slot machine of aspect 4-6 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 4-1 to 4-5,
The display device is characterized by suppressing successive display of suggestive images at the same timing during periods other than the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate, false premonition of increased win rate) after it has been decided whether or not to grant the bonus (increased win rate).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a period other than the premonition period after it has been determined whether or not to grant a privilege from being mistaken for a premonition period.

[Form 5]
The slot machine of form 5-1 is,
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A bonus granting decision means (a lottery for changing to an increased win rate) for deciding whether or not to grant a bonus (increased win rate);
a bonus notification means for performing a bonus notification (a performance result indicating that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted) for notifying a player that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted in a specific game (a final game of the winning rate increase precursor) after a number of games have been played since the game in which it was determined that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted;
Equipped with
The performances that take place during one game are as follows:
A first specific suggestion effect that displays a specific suggestion image (chance logo A) after executing a first type of effect (effect A);
A second specific suggestion effect that displays the specific suggestion image (chance logo A) after executing a second type of effect (effect B);
A first special suggestion effect that displays a special suggestion image (chance logo B) after executing the first type of effect (effect A);
A second special suggestion effect that displays the special suggestion image (chance logo B) after executing the second type of effect (effect B);
Including,
After it has been decided that the benefit (increased winning rate) will be granted, premonition control (a scenario including a presentation pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a presentation result three or more times) can be executed to produce the first specific suggestion effect and the second specific suggestion effect (a presentation pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a presentation result) with a high probability among the first specific suggestion effect, the second specific suggestion effect, the first special suggestion effect, and the second special suggestion effect in multiple games up to the specific game (the final game in which the premonition of increased winning rate is achieved).
According to this feature, after it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded, in multiple games leading up to the specific game in which the bonus award is notified, a first type of presentation or a second type of presentation is executed, and then a presentation in which a specific suggestion image is displayed occurs frequently, thereby creating anticipation that a bonus has been awarded.

The slot machine of aspect 5-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 5-1,
After it has been decided that the benefit (increased win rate) will be granted, premonition control (a scenario including a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result three or more times) can be executed to produce the first special suggestion effect and the second special suggestion effect (a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result) with a high probability among the first specific suggestion effect, the second specific suggestion effect, the first special suggestion effect, and the second special suggestion effect in multiple games up to the specific game (the final game in which the premonition of increased win rate is achieved).
According to this feature, after it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded, in multiple games up to the specific game in which the bonus award notification is made, a first type of presentation or a second type of presentation is executed, and then a presentation in which a special suggestion image is displayed occurs frequently, thereby creating anticipation that a bonus has been awarded.

The slot machine of aspect 5-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 5-1 or 5-2,
The specific suggestion image (chance logo A) and the special suggestion image (chance logo B) each include a plurality of types (chance logo A (small), chance logo A (large) / chance logo B (small), chance logo B (large)),
This is characterized in that when the specific suggestion image (chance logo A) is displayed and when the special suggestion image (chance logo B) is displayed, the ratio of the types of modes to be executed differs depending on whether or not the bonus award notification (presentation result indicating control to increase the winning rate) is performed in the specific game (the final game of the sign of increasing the winning rate).
According to this feature, attention can be drawn to the manner in which the specific suggestion image or special suggestion image is executed.

The slot machine of aspect 5-4 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-3,
a pre-determination means (internal lottery) for determining a display result that is permitted to be derived before the display result is derived;
The presentation carried out during one game is characterized by including an acceptable suggestion presentation which displays an acceptable suggestion image (small win announcement) suggesting the result of the determination by the advance determination means after executing the first type of presentation (presentation A) or the second type of presentation (presentation B).
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize a display result that is permitted to be derived from a suggestive image displayed after the first type of presentation or the second type of presentation.

The slot machine of aspect 5-5 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-4,
The first type of effect (effect A) and the second type of effect (effect B) are both characterized in that they are effects that start based on the start operation of the game.
According to this feature, the first type of effect and the second type of effect both start at the same timing, so that the difference between the suggestive images displayed thereafter can be made more noticeable.

The slot machine of aspect 5-6 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 5-1 to 5-5,
The display of the same suggestive image consecutively is suppressed during the period other than the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate, false premonition of increased win rate) after it has been determined whether or not to grant the bonus (increased win rate).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a period other than the premonition period after it has been determined whether or not to grant a privilege from being mistaken for a premonition period.

[Form 6]
The slot machine of form 6-1 is as follows:
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A value updating means (main control unit 41) for updating a value (number of normal games) in a normal state;
A special state transition means (main control unit 41) that can transition to a special state (CZ state) that has a higher rate of being controlled to a specific state (AT state) than the normal state when the value (normal game number) updated by the value update means reaches a specified value (specified game number);
A bonus granting decision means (win rate increase transition lottery) for deciding whether or not to grant a bonus (win rate increase) for increasing the rate of being controlled to the specific state (AT state) when being controlled to the special state (CZ state) based on the game result being a specific result (weak chance replay, strong chance replay) in the normal state;
a bonus notification means for performing a bonus notification (a performance result indicating that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted) for notifying a player that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted in a specific game (a final game of the winning rate increase precursor) after a number of games have been played since the game in which it was determined that the bonus (increased win rate) will be granted;
Equipped with
After it is determined that the bonus (increased win rate) will be awarded, if the value (number of normal games) updated by the value update means during the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) until the specific game reaches a prescribed value (premonition of increased win rate), transition to the special state (CZ state) at least after the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) has elapsed;
This is characterized in that when the value (number of normal games) updated by the value update means during the premonition period (premonition of increased winning rate) reaches a specified value (specified number of games), it is possible to identifiably indicate that the specified value has been reached (display indicating CZ or AT preparation).
According to this feature, after it has been decided that a bonus will be awarded, if the numerical value updated by the numerical value update means reaches a specified value during the premonition period until the specific game in which the bonus award notification is made, a transition to a special state will occur at least after the premonition period has elapsed.In this case, since the fact that the specified value has been reached is identifiably indicated, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distrustful even if the numerical value updated by the numerical value update means does not reach the specified value and the transition to the special state does not occur.

The slot machine of aspect 6-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 6-1,
This is characterized in that, after the numerical value (number of normal games) updated by the numerical value update means during the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) reaches a specified value (specified number of games), if the game result becomes the specific result (weak chance replay, strong chance replay) before the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) has elapsed, it is possible to perform advantageous control (first win rate increase lottery) that is advantageous to the player different from the determination made by the bonus granting determination means.
According to this feature, if the numerical value updated by the numerical value update means during the premonition period reaches a specified value and the game result becomes a specific result before the premonition period has elapsed and the transition to the special state occurs, advantageous control different from that determined by the bonus granting determination means is performed, so that the player is not disadvantaged even if the period until the transition to the special state is extended due to the premonition period.

The slot machine of aspect 6-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
The specified value (specified number of games) can be set from multiple values.
Only when the maximum value (ceiling number of games) among a plurality of values is set as the prescribed value (prescribed number of games), if the numerical value (normal number of games) updated by the numerical value update means during the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) reaches the prescribed value (prescribed number of games), a specific indication is given that the prescribed value has been reached (display indicating CZ or AT preparation).
According to this feature, the cause can be recognized only when the special state is not entered even though the value updated by the value update means exceeds the maximum value that can be set as a specified value.

The slot machine of aspect 6-4 is the slot machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
The specified value (specified number of games) can be set from multiple values.
Regardless of which of a plurality of values is set as the specified value (specified number of games), when the value (normal number of games) updated by the value update means during the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) reaches the specified value (specified number of games), a specific indication is given (display indicating CZ or AT preparation) that the specified value has been reached.
According to this feature, regardless of which of multiple values is set as the specified value, if the numerical value updated by the numerical value update means during the premonition period reaches the specified value, this fact is identifiably indicated, so that processing does not become complicated.

The slot machine of aspect 6-5 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 6-1 to 6-4,
The privilege is characterized by controlling the special state (CZ state) to a special state (increased win rate) which makes it easier to be granted the right to control the rate at which the special state (CZ state) is controlled to the specific state (AT state).
According to this feature, it is expected that the right to exercise control to increase the proportion of control to a specific state will be granted by being controlled to a special state.

The slot machine of aspect 6-6 is the slot machine according to aspect 6-5,
When the value (number of normal games) updated by the value update means in the special state (increased win rate) reaches a specified value (specified number of games), the state is transitioned to the special state (CZ state) at least after the special state (increased win rate) has ended.
According to this feature, the special state is transitioned to after the right to exercise control to increase the proportion of control to the specific state in the special state is granted, so that it is possible to expect that the special state will be controlled to the specific state in the special state.

The slot machine of aspect 6-7 is the slot machine according to aspect 6-6,
A feature of the present invention is that when the value (normal number of games) updated by the value update means in the special state (increased winning percentage) reaches a specified value (specified number of games), it is possible to identifiably indicate (display "CZ or AT preparation in progress") that the specified value has been reached.
According to this feature, when the numerical value updated by the numerical value update means reaches a specified value in a special state, the state will transition to the special state at least after the special state has passed. In this case, since the fact that the specified value has been reached is identifiably indicated, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming distrustful even when the numerical value updated by the numerical value update means does not reach the specified value and transition to the special state does not occur.

The slot machine of aspect 6-8 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 6-1 to 6-7,
A specific state transition means (main control unit 41) transitions to the specific state (AT state) when the value (normal game number) updated by the value update means reaches a specified value (specified game number),
When the value (number of normal games) updated by the value update means reaches a specified value (specified number of games) outside the premonition period (premonition of increased winning percentage), it is possible to perform a state suggestion effect (CZ/AT premonition effect) that suggests whether to transition to the special state (CZ state) or the specific state (AT state) over multiple games.
When the value (number of normal games) updated by the value update means during the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) reaches a specified value (specified number of games), the state indication effect (CZ/AT premonition effect) is performed over multiple games after the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) has elapsed.
According to this feature, even if the numerical value updated by the numerical value update means during the premonition period reaches a specified value, attention can be drawn to whether reaching the specified value will result in a transition to a special state or a transition to a specific state.

The slot machine of aspect 6-9 is the slot machine according to aspect 6-8,
When the value (number of normal games) updated by the value update means during the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) reaches a specified value (specified number of games), the state indication effect (CZ/AT premonition effect) is performed over multiple games after the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) has elapsed and the bonus (increased win rate) has been awarded.
According to this feature, after the precursor period has elapsed and the benefit has been granted, attention can be drawn to whether the predetermined value will result in a transition to a special state or a specific state.

The slot machine of aspect 6-10 is the slot machine according to aspect 6-8 or 6-9,
When a decision is not made to grant the bonus (increased win rate) based on the game result being a specific result (weak chance replay, strong chance replay) in the normal state, the period can be controlled to a false premonition period (false premonition of increased win rate) over multiple games,
When the value (number of normal games) updated by the value update means during the false premonition period (false premonition of increased winning percentage) reaches a specified value (specified number of games), the state indication effect (CZ/AT premonition effect) is performed over multiple games after the false premonition period (false premonition of increased winning percentage) has elapsed.
According to this feature, even if the numerical value updated by the numerical value update means during the false precursor period reaches a specified value, attention can be drawn to whether reaching the specified value will result in a transition to a special state or a transition to a specific state.

The slot machine of aspect 6-11 is the slot machine according to aspect 6-10,
The present invention is characterized in that the status indication effect (CZ/AT premonition effect) is performed in a common manner both when the status indication effect (CZ/AT premonition effect) is performed over multiple games after the premonition period (premonition of increased win rate) has passed and the bonus (increased win rate) has been granted, and when the status indication effect (CZ/AT premonition effect) is performed over multiple games after the false premonition period (false premonition of increased win rate) has passed.
According to this feature, whether the status suggestion performance is performed after the premonition period has elapsed and a bonus has been awarded, or whether the status suggestion performance is performed after the false premonition period has elapsed, the status suggestion performance is performed in a common manner, so that the content of the status suggestion performance is easy to understand.

The slot machine of aspect 6-12 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 6-8 to 6-11,
A feature of this invention is that the presentation style of the presentation (win rate increase premonition presentation) performed during the premonition period (win rate increase premonition) is different from the presentation style of the state indication presentation (CZ/AT premonition presentation).
According to this feature, it is possible to distinguish whether a performance during a premonition period is being performed or a performance suggesting a state is being performed.

[Form 7]
The slot machine of form 7-1 is as follows:
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A means for controlling an advantageous zone (main control unit 41) for controlling an advantageous zone that can be controlled to an advantageous state (AT state) that is advantageous to a player;
a first increased gaming value amount counting means (advantageous zone net increase number counter) for counting a first increased gaming value amount (advantageous zone net increase number) which is the amount of gaming value increased in the advantageous zone;
A favorable zone terminating means (main control unit 41) for terminating the favorable zone when the first increased gaming value amount (favorable zone net increase number) exceeds a specific amount (2400 coins) in the favorable zone;
a second increased gaming value amount counting means (signal counter) for counting a second increased gaming value amount (signal counter value) which is an amount of the gaming value increased in the advantageous state (AT state);
a specific signal output means (main control unit 41) for outputting a specific signal (a 100-coin signal) each time the second increased gaming value amount (signal counter value) reaches a predetermined amount (100 coins);
Equipped with
The advantageous state (AT state) includes a first advantageous state (first AT state) that is controlled first after the start of the advantageous state, a second advantageous state (second AT state) that is controlled after the first advantageous state, and a third advantageous state (ED state) that is controllable after the second advantageous state and continues until the first increased gaming value amount (advantageous zone net increase in number of coins) exceeds the specific amount (2,400 coins);
The second increased game value amount counting means (signal counter) starts counting the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) from the start of the first advantageous state (first AT state), takes over and counts the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) that was counted in the first advantageous state (first AT state) when controlled to the second advantageous state (second AT state), and takes over and counts the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) that was counted in the second advantageous state (second AT state) when controlled to the third advantageous state (ED state).
According to this feature, a specific signal is output each time the second increased game value amount, which is the amount of game value increased in the advantageous state, reaches a predetermined amount, so that by counting the specific signals, it is possible to externally specify the amount of game value increased in the advantageous state. Also, when controlled to the second advantageous state, the second increased game value amount counted in the first advantageous state is continued and counted, and when controlled to the third advantageous state, the second increased game value amount counted in the second advantageous state is continued and counted, so that even when transitioning from the first advantageous state to the second advantageous state, or from the second advantageous state to the third advantageous state, the second increased game value amount counted up to that point is continued, so that it is possible to accurately specify the amount of game value increased since the start of the advantageous state by counting the specific signals.

The slot machine of aspect 7-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 7-1,
After control into the advantageous state (AT state), the minimum amount of gaming value that can be increased until the advantageous state (AT state) ends is greater than the predetermined amount (100 coins).
According to this feature, since the amount of gaming value that can be increased minimally after control to an advantageous state is achieved and before the advantageous state ends is greater than a predetermined amount, it is guaranteed that a specific signal will be output at least once after control to an advantageous state is achieved, and it becomes possible to determine that control to an advantageous state has been achieved by the specific signal.

The slot machine of aspect 7-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 7-1 or 7-2,
The device is characterized in that after control into the third advantageous state (ED state), the minimum amount of gaming value that can be increased until the third advantageous state (ED state) ends is greater than the predetermined amount (100 coins).
According to this feature, since the amount of gaming value that can be increased minimally after control to the third advantageous state is achieved and before the third advantageous state ends is greater than the specified amount, it is guaranteed that a specific signal will be output at least once after control to the third advantageous state is achieved.

The slot machine of aspect 7-4 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-3,
When a transition condition (ED transition condition) is satisfied in the advantageous state (AT state), the third advantageous state (ED state) is controlled,
After control into the advantageous state (AT state), the minimum amount of gaming value that can be increased until the transition condition (ED transition condition) is met is greater than the predetermined amount (100 coins).
According to this feature, since the minimum amount of increase in the gaming value that can occur after control to the advantageous state and before the transition condition is met is greater than a predetermined amount, it is guaranteed that a specific signal will be output at least once after control to the advantageous state and before the transition condition is met and transition is made to the third advantageous state.

The slot machine of aspect 7-5 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-4,
A display means (liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
Displaying on the display means (liquid crystal display 51) the amount of game value acquired (the acquired number display counter value), which is the amount of game value acquired since the advantageous state (AT state) started;
This is characterized in that the game in which the second increased game value counting means (signal counter) starts counting the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) is the same as the game in which the display of the acquired game value amount (acquired number display counter value) starts.
According to this feature, a specific signal can be output each time the amount of acquired gaming value becomes a multiple of a predetermined amount.

The slot machine of aspect 7-6 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-5,
A display means (liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
After the start of the advantageous state (AT state), until the second advantageous state (second AT state), the display means (liquid crystal display 51) displays an acquired gaming value amount (acquired number display counter value), which is the amount of gaming value acquired since the start of the advantageous state (AT state);
When controlled to the third advantageous state (ED state), the acquired gaming value amount (acquired number display counter value) displayed on the display means (liquid crystal display 51) is switched to a display based on the first increased gaming value amount (net increase in number of coins in the advantageous zone).
According to this feature, the acquired gaming value amount, which starts to be counted when the advantageous state starts, is displayed up to the second advantageous state, and the display can be switched to one based on the first increased gaming value amount at a timing that is difficult to notice.

The slot machine of aspect 7-7 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 7-1 to 7-6,
the second increased game value amount counting means (signal counter) adds the increase in the game value and the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) in accordance with the progress of the game, subtracts the predetermined amount (100 medals) from the second increased game value amount (net increase in the number of medals in the AT state) when the addition result is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (100 medals), and adds the increase in the game value and the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) obtained by subtracting the predetermined amount (100 medals) from the next game,
The specific signal output means is characterized in that it outputs the specific signal when the result of the second increased gaming value counting means (signal counter) adding the increase in gaming value to the second increased gaming value amount (signal counter value) is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (100 coins).
According to this feature, the second increased gaming value amount for outputting a specific signal every predetermined amount can be counted using a small storage area.

The slot machine of aspect 7-8 is the slot machine according to aspect 7-7,
The second increased game value amount counting means (signal counter) is characterized in that it adds the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) to the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game (number of medals paid out), and then subtracts the amount of game value used in the game (number of medals inserted).
According to this feature, even if the second increased gaming value amount is less than the amount of gaming value used in the game, the second increased gaming value amount can be treated as a positive value.

The slot machine of aspect 7-9 is the slot machine according to aspect 7-8,
The second increased game value amount counting means (signal counter) is characterized in that it sets the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) to 0 if the result of adding the second increased game value amount (signal counter value) to the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game (number of medals paid out) and then subtracting the amount of game value used in the game (number of medals inserted) is less than 0.
According to this feature, even if the result of adding the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of a game and then subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game is less than zero, there is no need to handle negative values.

The slot machine of aspect 7-10 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 7-7 to 7-9,
The first increased game value amount counting means (profitable zone net increase number counter) and the second increased game value amount counting means (signal counter) are characterized in that they each separately read out the amount of game value awarded as a result of a game (number of medals paid out) and the amount of game value used in the game (number of medals inserted), and count the first increased game value amount (net increase number in favorable zone) and the second increased game value amount (signal counter value).
According to this feature, there is no need to save the amount of game value awarded as a result of the game read by the first increased game value counting means or the second increased game value counting means, and the amount of game value used in the game, so the processing does not become complicated.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
A selection effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) is provided for displaying options (characters) in a plurality of areas (left area, middle area, right area), and executing a selection effect suggesting an advantage (possibility of winning the CZ state or the AT state) according to the option (character) displayed in an area selected from the plurality of areas,
By displaying a plurality of options (characters) of the same type in the plurality of regions (left region, center region, right region), it is possible to suggest a more advantageous situation than when different types of options (characters) are displayed in each of the plurality of regions,
In the selection presentation, multiple options (characters) of the same type are displayed in the multiple areas (left area, middle area, right area), and when selecting any of the areas in which the same type of options (characters) are displayed, the same type of options (characters) are displayed in an area among the multiple areas including a specific area (middle area), and only the specific area (middle area) is selected from among the areas in which the same type of options (characters) are displayed.
According to this feature, displaying multiple options of the same type in multiple areas during a selection presentation suggests a more advantageous situation than if different types of options were each displayed in multiple areas; and when multiple options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas during a selection presentation and any area displaying the same type of option is selected, the same type of option is displayed in an area among the multiple areas, including a specific area, and only the specific area among the areas displaying the same type of option is selected, so that when options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas and any area displaying the same type of option is selected, it is easy to recognize that this is the case.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 8-1,
When selecting one of the multiple regions (left region, center region, right region) in the selection presentation, it is possible to perform operation trigger selection control (control to execute the selection part triggered by a presentation operation) in which an area is selected triggered by a presentation operation by the player, and non-operation trigger selection control (control to execute the selection part triggered by a first stop operation or a third stop operation) in which an area is selected without being triggered by a presentation operation by the player,
When multiple options (characters) of the same type are displayed in the multiple areas (left area, middle area, right area), the operation trigger selection control (control for executing a selected part triggered by a presentation operation) is performed more frequently than when different types of options (characters) are displayed in each of the multiple areas.
According to this feature, when multiple options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas in a selection presentation, there is a higher probability that operation-triggered selection control will be performed in which an area is selected in response to a presentation operation by the player than when different types of options are displayed in each of the multiple areas, thereby drawing attention to the situation in which the same type of options are displayed in multiple areas.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 8-1 or 8-2,
When selecting one of the multiple regions (left region, middle region, right region) in the selection performance, it is possible to perform a specific selection control (control to execute a selected part with a cut-in performance) that selects a region with a specific performance (cut-in performance) and a non-specific selection control (control to execute a selected part without a cut-in performance) that selects a region without the specific performance,
When multiple options (characters) of the same type are displayed in the multiple areas (left area, center area, right area) in the selection performance, the specific selection control (control for executing a selection part accompanied by a cut-in performance) is performed more frequently than when different types of options (characters) are displayed in each of the multiple areas.
According to this feature, when multiple options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas in a selection presentation, the probability that specific selection control is performed in which an area is selected accompanied by a specific presentation is higher than when options of different types are displayed in each of the multiple areas, so that it is possible to draw attention to a situation in which options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-3,
When one of the multiple regions (left region, center region, right region) is selected in the selection performance, it is possible to perform operation trigger selection control (control to execute the selection part triggered by a performance operation) to select a region triggered by a performance operation by the player, and non-operation trigger selection control (control to execute the selection part triggered by a first stop operation or a third stop operation) to select a region without triggering a performance operation by the player,
When any one of the multiple regions (left region, center region, right region) is selected in the selection performance, it is possible to perform a specific selection control (control to execute the selection part with a cut-in performance) that selects a region with a specific performance (cut-in performance) and a non-specific selection control (control to execute the selection part without a cut-in performance) that selects a region without the specific performance,
This is characterized in that when the operation trigger selection control (control for executing a selection part triggered by a performance operation) is performed in the selection performance, the specific selection control (control for executing a selection part accompanied by a cut-in performance) is performed more frequently than when the non-operation trigger selection control (control for executing a selection part triggered by a first stop operation or a third stop operation) is performed.
According to this feature, when operation-triggered selection control is performed in a selection presentation in which an area is selected in response to a presentation operation by the player, the proportion of specific selection control being performed in which an area is selected accompanied by a specific presentation is higher than the proportion of non-operation-triggered selection control being performed in which an area is selected without being triggered by a presentation operation by the player, thereby drawing attention to the situation in which specific selection control is performed in the selection presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-5 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-4,
The options (characters) displayed in the multiple areas (left area, middle area, right area) in the selection performance include multiple types of options (characters A to C) with different degrees of advantage,
When multiple options (characters) of the same type are displayed in the multiple areas (left area, center area, right area) in the selection presentation, the multiple displayed options (characters) of the same type do not include an option (character A) of the type that suggests the lowest degree of advantage among the multiple types of options.
According to this feature, even in a situation where a favorable situation is suggested by displaying multiple options of the same type in multiple areas in the selection presentation, the multiple displayed options of the same type do not include the type of option that suggests the lowest degree of advantage, so the player's expectations are not diminished by the types of options displayed.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-5,
The options (characters) displayed in the multiple areas (left area, middle area, right area) in the selection performance include multiple types of options (characters A to C) with different degrees of advantage,
When multiple options (characters) of the same type are displayed in the multiple areas (left area, center area, right area) in the selection presentation, the multiple displayed options (characters) of the same type include an option (character C) of a type that suggests the highest degree of advantage among the multiple types of options.
According to this feature, in a situation where a favorable situation is suggested by displaying multiple options of the same type in multiple areas in the selection presentation, the multiple options of the same type displayed include the type of option that suggests the highest degree of advantage, so the player's expectations can be increased by the type of options displayed.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-7 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-6,
When different types of options (characters) including a first type of option (character A) suggesting a first degree of advantage and a second type of option (character B) suggesting a second degree of advantage that is more advantageous than the first degree of advantage are displayed in the multiple regions in the selection performance, the first type of option (character A) is displayed in the first region (left region) of the multiple regions, and the second type of option (character B) is displayed in the second region (middle region) of the multiple regions;
In the selection presentation, the same type of options (characters) are displayed in the first area (left area) and the second area (middle area), and when any of the areas displaying the same type of options (characters) is selected, the second area (middle area) is selected as the specific area from among the areas displaying the same type of options (characters).
According to this feature, in the selection presentation, the same type of option is displayed in the first area and the second area, and when one of the areas displaying the same type of option is selected, the second area is selected in which the type of option suggesting a relatively high degree of advantage is displayed when different types of options are respectively displayed, so that the player can intuitively sense that the type of option suggesting a high degree of advantage has been selected.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-8 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-7,
The plurality of regions in the selection performance include a first region (left region) and a second region (middle region) that is more noticeable than the first region (left region),
In the selection presentation, the same type of options (characters) are displayed in the first area (left area) and the second area (middle area), and when any area in which the same type of options (characters) are displayed is selected, the second area (middle area) from among the areas in which the same type of options (characters) are displayed is selected as the specific area.
According to this feature, in the selection presentation, the same type of options are displayed in the first area and the second area, and when any of the areas displaying the same type of options is selected, the second area, which is more noticeable than the first area, is selected, so that when any of the areas displaying the same type of options is selected, it is easy to recognize that this is the case.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-9 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 8-1 to 8-8,
A bonus suggestion effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) is provided for executing a bonus suggestion effect (CZ/AT precursor effect) that suggests whether or not a bonus (CZ state, AT state) will be granted depending on the option (character) selected in the selection effect,
A feature of this invention is that the rate at which the bonus (CZ state, AT state) will be granted varies depending on the type of bonus suggestion effect (CZ/AT precursor effect) corresponding to the option (character) selected in the selection effect.
According to this feature, the probability of suggesting that a bonus will be awarded varies depending on the type of bonus suggestion presentation corresponding to the option selected in the selection presentation, so that attention can be drawn to the option selected in the selection presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 8-10 is the gaming machine according to aspect 8-9,
The options (characters) displayed in the plurality of areas (left area, middle area, right area) in the selection performance include a special option (character C) that is suggested to definitely give a privilege (CZ state, AT state) by the corresponding privilege suggestion performance (CZ/AT sign performance),
When the special option (character C) is displayed in the selection presentation, the ratio of multiple options being displayed in the multiple areas (left area, center area, right area) is higher than when other types of options (character A, character B) are displayed.
According to this feature, when special options are displayed, multiple options are likely to be displayed, so that the player can expect to receive a special benefit when the special option is displayed.

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
A selection effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) is provided for displaying options (characters) in a plurality of areas (left area, middle area, right area), and executing a selection effect suggesting an advantage (possibility of winning the CZ state or the AT state) according to the option (character) displayed in an area selected from the plurality of areas,
By displaying a plurality of options (characters) of the same type in the plurality of regions (left region, center region, right region), it is possible to suggest a more advantageous situation than when different types of options (characters) are displayed in each of the plurality of regions,
It is possible to perform a first display control of displaying a first number (two) of options (characters) of the same type in the plurality of regions (left region, middle region, right region), and a second display control of displaying a second number (three) of options (characters) of the same type in the plurality of regions (left region, middle region, right region),
In either case, when the first display control is performed in the selection presentation to select any of the areas in which the same type of option (character) is displayed, and when the second display control is performed to select any of the areas in which the same type of option (character) is displayed, the same type of option (character) is displayed in an area among the multiple areas including a specific area (middle area), and only the specific area (middle area) is selected from among the areas in which the same type of option (character) is displayed.
According to this feature, displaying multiple options of the same type in multiple areas in a selection presentation suggests a more advantageous situation than when different types of options are displayed in each of the multiple areas, and in addition, when a first number of options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas in a selection presentation and any area displaying the same type of options is selected, a second number of options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas and any area displaying the same type of options is selected, the same type of options are displayed in an area among the multiple areas including a specific area, and only the specific area among the areas displaying the same type of options is selected, so that when options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas and any area displaying the same type of options is selected, it is easy to recognize that this is the case.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
When different types of options (characters) including a first type of option (character A) suggesting a first degree of advantage and a second type of option (character B) suggesting a second degree of advantage that is more advantageous than the first degree of advantage are displayed in the multiple regions in the selection performance, the first type of option (character A) is displayed in the first region (left region) of the multiple regions, and the second type of option (character B) is displayed in the second region (middle region) of the multiple regions;
In the selection presentation, the same type of options (characters) are displayed in the first area (left area) and the second area (middle area), and when any of the areas displaying the same type of options (characters) is selected, the second area (middle area) is selected as the specific area from among the areas displaying the same type of options (characters).
According to this feature, in the selection presentation, the same type of option is displayed in the first area and the second area, and when one of the areas displaying the same type of option is selected, the second area is selected in which the type of option suggesting a relatively high degree of advantage is displayed when different types of options are respectively displayed, so that the player can intuitively sense that the type of option suggesting a high degree of advantage has been selected.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1 or 9-2,
The plurality of regions in the selection performance include a first region (left region) and a second region (middle region) that is more noticeable than the first region (left region),
In the selection presentation, the same type of options (characters) are displayed in the first area (left area) and the second area (middle area), and when any area in which the same type of options (characters) are displayed is selected, the second area (middle area) from among the areas in which the same type of options (characters) are displayed is selected as the specific area.
According to this feature, in the selection presentation, the same type of options are displayed in the first area and the second area, and when any of the areas displaying the same type of options is selected, the second area, which is more noticeable than the first area, is selected, so that when any of the areas displaying the same type of options is selected, it is easy to recognize that this is the case.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 9-1 to 9-3,
A bonus suggestion effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) is provided for executing a bonus suggestion effect (CZ/AT precursor effect) that suggests whether or not a bonus (CZ state, AT state) will be granted depending on the option (character) selected in the selection effect,
A feature of this invention is that the rate at which the bonus (CZ state, AT state) will be granted varies depending on the type of bonus suggestion effect (CZ/AT precursor effect) corresponding to the option (character) selected in the selection effect.
According to this feature, the probability of suggesting that a bonus will be awarded varies depending on the type of bonus suggestion presentation corresponding to the option selected in the selection presentation, so that attention can be drawn to the option selected in the selection presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-4,
The options (characters) displayed in the plurality of areas (left area, middle area, right area) in the selection performance include a special option (character C) that is suggested to definitely give a privilege (CZ state, AT state) by the corresponding privilege suggestion performance (CZ/AT sign performance),
When the special option (character C) is displayed in the selection presentation, the ratio of multiple options being displayed in the multiple areas (left area, center area, right area) is higher than when other types of options (character A, character B) are displayed.
According to this feature, when special options are displayed, multiple options are likely to be displayed, so that the player can expect to receive a special benefit when the special option is displayed.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-6 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 9-1 to 9-5,
The second number is characterized in that all of the plurality of regions (left region, center region, right region) are the same type of option (character) (three).
According to this feature, by performing the second display control, the same types of options are displayed in all areas, so that it is possible to suggest from the appearance that the situation is advantageous.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) for playing games,
A selection effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) is provided for displaying options (characters) in a plurality of areas (left area, middle area, right area), and executing a selection effect suggesting an advantage (possibility of winning the CZ state or the AT state) according to the option (character) displayed in an area selected from the plurality of areas,
By displaying a plurality of options (characters) of the same type in the plurality of regions (left region, center region, right region), it is possible to suggest a more advantageous situation than when different types of options (characters) are displayed in each of the plurality of regions,
It is possible to perform a specific display control of displaying a plurality of options of a specific type (character B) in the plurality of regions (left region, middle region, right region), and a predetermined display control of displaying a plurality of options of a predetermined type (character C) in the plurality of regions (left region, middle region, right region),
In either case, when the specific display control is performed in the selection presentation to select any of the areas in which the specific type of option (character B) is displayed, or when the predetermined display control is performed to select any of the areas in which the predetermined type of option (character C) is displayed, the specific type of option (character B) or the predetermined type of option (character C) is displayed in an area among the multiple areas that includes a specific area (middle area), and only the specific area (middle area) is selected from the areas in which the specific type of option (character B) or the predetermined type of option (character C) is displayed.
According to this feature, displaying multiple options of the same type in multiple areas in a selection presentation suggests a more advantageous situation than if different types of options are displayed in each of the multiple areas; and when multiple options of a specific type are displayed in multiple areas in a selection presentation and any area in which an option of the specific type is displayed is selected, when multiple options of a predetermined type are displayed in multiple areas and any area in which an option of the predetermined type is displayed is selected, options of the specific or predetermined type are displayed in an area among the multiple areas, including the specific option, and only the specific option is selected among the areas in which options of the specific or predetermined type are displayed, so that when options of the same type are displayed in multiple areas and any area in which an option of the same type is displayed is selected, it is easy to recognize that fact.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1,
When different types of options (characters) including a first type of option (character A) suggesting a first degree of advantage and a second type of option (character B) suggesting a second degree of advantage that is more advantageous than the first degree of advantage are displayed in the multiple regions in the selection performance, the first type of option (character A) is displayed in the first region (left region) of the multiple regions, and the second type of option (character B) is displayed in the second region (middle region) of the multiple regions;
In the selection presentation, the same type of options (characters) are displayed in the first area (left area) and the second area (middle area), and when any of the areas displaying the same type of options (characters) is selected, the second area (middle area) is selected as the specific area from among the areas displaying the same type of options (characters).
According to this feature, in the selection presentation, the same type of option is displayed in the first area and the second area, and when one of the areas displaying the same type of option is selected, the second area is selected in which the type of option suggesting a relatively high degree of advantage is displayed when different types of options are respectively displayed, so that the player can intuitively sense that the type of option suggesting a high degree of advantage has been selected.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1 or 10-2,
The plurality of regions in the selection performance include a first region (left region) and a second region (middle region) that is more noticeable than the first region (left region),
In the selection presentation, the same type of options (characters) are displayed in the first area (left area) and the second area (middle area), and when any area in which the same type of options (characters) are displayed is selected, the second area (middle area) from among the areas in which the same type of options (characters) are displayed is selected as the specific area.
According to this feature, in the selection presentation, the same type of options are displayed in the first area and the second area, and when any of the areas displaying the same type of options is selected, the second area, which is more noticeable than the first area, is selected, so that when any of the areas displaying the same type of options is selected, it is easy to recognize that this is the case.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 10-1 to 10-3,
A bonus suggestion effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) is provided for executing a bonus suggestion effect (CZ/AT precursor effect) that suggests whether or not a bonus (CZ state, AT state) will be granted depending on the option (character) selected in the selection effect,
A feature of this invention is that the rate at which the bonus (CZ state, AT state) will be granted varies depending on the type of bonus suggestion effect (CZ/AT precursor effect) corresponding to the option (character) selected in the selection effect.
According to this feature, the probability of suggesting that a bonus will be awarded varies depending on the type of bonus suggestion presentation corresponding to the option selected in the selection presentation, so that attention can be drawn to the option selected in the selection presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-4,
The options (characters) displayed in the plurality of areas (left area, middle area, right area) in the selection performance include a special option (character C) that is suggested to definitely give a privilege (CZ state, AT state) by the corresponding privilege suggestion performance (CZ/AT sign performance),
When the special option (character C) is displayed in the selection presentation, the ratio of multiple options being displayed in the multiple areas (left area, center area, right area) is higher than when other types of options (character A, character B) are displayed.
According to this feature, when special options are displayed, multiple options are likely to be displayed, so that the player can expect to receive a special benefit when the special option is displayed.

[Form 11]
The slot machine of form 11-1 is
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A special state control means (main control unit 41) controls the game to a special state (ED state) in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified until the increase in the gaming value (the net increase in the advantageous zone) exceeds a specific amount (2,400 coins) when a specific condition (ED transition condition) is established;
A bonus granting means (sub-control unit 91) capable of granting a bonus (setting suggestion performance) based on the establishment of a special condition (a strong chance replay, a weak chance replay winning/a specific replay combination stopping) in the special state (ED state);
Equipped with
When the period controlled to the special state (ED state) exceeds a specific period, control is performed so that the special condition (stop of a specific replay combination) is not established, or even if the special condition (winning a strong chance replay or weak chance replay) is established, control is performed so that the bonus (setting suggestion performance) is not granted.
According to this feature, if the period during which the game is controlled to the special state is prolonged by intentionally suppressing the increase in the gaming value after the game is controlled to the special state, the bonus will no longer be awarded after the specific period has elapsed, thereby preventing the period during which the game is controlled to the special state from being intentionally prolonged for the purpose of awarding a bonus.

The slot machine of aspect 11-2 is the slot machine according to aspect 11-1,
The specific period is characterized in that it is a period (120 games) longer than the number of games obtained by dividing the increase (400 coins) required for the increase in gaming value (net increase in number of coins in the advantageous zone) to exceed the specific amount (2,400 coins) after control into the special state (ED state) by the average increase per game (approximately 3.9 coins).
According to this feature, even if an operation that suppresses an increase in the gaming value is mistakenly performed, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage.

The slot machine of aspect 11-3 is the slot machine according to aspect 11-1 or 11-2,
When the period controlled in the special state (ED state) exceeds a specific period, the special state (ED state) is terminated.
According to this feature, if the period during which the game is controlled to the special state is prolonged by intentionally suppressing the increase in the gaming value after the game is controlled to the special state, the special state itself will end after a specific period of time has elapsed, thereby preventing the period during which the game is controlled to the special state from being intentionally prolonged for the purpose of granting a bonus.

The slot machine of form 11-4 is
A variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (patterns),
A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a winning prize can be generated according to the display result,
A special state control means (main control unit 41) controls the game to a special state (ED state) in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified until the increase in the gaming value (the net increase in the advantageous zone) exceeds a specific amount (2,400 coins) when a specific condition (ED transition condition) is established;
A bonus granting means (sub-control unit 91) capable of granting a bonus (setting suggestion performance) based on the establishment of a special condition (a strong chance replay, a weak chance replay winning/a specific replay combination stopping) in the special state (ED state);
Equipped with
When an operation mode other than that notified in the special state (ED state) is performed, control is performed so that the special condition (stop of a specific replay combination) is not established, or control is performed so that the bonus (setting suggestion performance) is not granted even if the special condition (winning a strong chance replay or weak chance replay) is established.
According to this feature, if, after being controlled to a special state, the increase in the gaming value is intentionally suppressed to prolong the period during which the game is controlled to the special state, control is performed so that the special condition is not established, or so that a bonus is not awarded even if the special condition is established, thereby preventing the period during which the game is controlled to the special state from being intentionally prolonged for the purpose of awarding a bonus.

The slot machine of aspect 11-5 is the slot machine according to aspect 11-4,
After an operation mode other than that notified in the special state (ED state) is performed, control is performed so that the special condition (stop of a specific replay combination) is not fulfilled until the release condition is fulfilled, or control is performed so that the bonus (setting suggestion presentation) is not granted even if the special condition (winning a strong chance replay or weak chance replay) is fulfilled, and when the special condition (winning a strong chance replay or weak chance replay/stop of a specific replay combination) is fulfilled after the release condition is fulfilled, the bonus (setting suggestion presentation) can be granted.
According to this feature, even if an operation mode other than the notified operation mode is performed, an excessive disadvantage will not be imposed.

The slot machine of aspect 11-6 is the slot machine according to aspect 11-4 or 11-5,
Even when the control is set so that the bonus (setting suggestion effect) is not awarded even if the special condition (winning a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay) is fulfilled, if the special condition (winning a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay) is fulfilled, an effect corresponding to the fulfillment of the special condition (chance replay suggestion effect) is executed.
According to this feature, even in a case where control is performed in which the benefit is not granted even when the special condition is fulfilled, it is possible to eliminate a sense of incongruity when the special condition is fulfilled.

The slot machine of aspect 11-7 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 11-1 to 11-6,
This is characterized by the fact that, when the special condition (winning a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay) is met before the specific condition (ED transition condition) is met, control is performed (third additional lottery) to extend the period during which the player is controlled to a favorable state (second AT state) that is advantageous to the player.
According to this feature, the special condition that triggers the granting of the benefit is the same as the condition under which control is exercised to extend the period during which the control is in an advantageous state if the specific condition is not met, thereby drawing attention to the fulfillment of the special condition.

The slot machine of aspect 11-8 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 11-1 to 11-7,
In the special state, a display (net increase in number of coins in advantageous zone/2400) is displayed indicating the increase in gaming value (net increase in number of coins in advantageous zone) and the specific amount (2400 coins).
This feature allows the driver to be aware of the time remaining until the special condition ends.

The slot machine of aspect 11-9 is the slot machine according to any one of aspects 11-1 to 11-8,
A display means (liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
It is possible to control the advantageous zone to an advantageous state (AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The special state (ED state) ends when the increase in the gaming value in the advantageous zone (net increase in the advantageous zone) exceeds the specific amount (2,400 coins),
After the start of the advantageous state (AT state), until the special state (ED state) is entered, the display means (liquid crystal display 51) displays an acquired gaming value amount (acquired number display counter value), which is the amount of gaming value acquired since the start of the advantageous state (AT state);
When controlled to the special state (ED state), the amount of acquired gaming value (acquired number display counter value) displayed on the display means (liquid crystal display 51) is switched to a display based on the increase in gaming value in the advantageous zone (net increase in number of coins in the advantageous zone).
According to this feature, until the special state is controlled, the amount of acquired gaming value that begins to be counted when the advantageous state begins is displayed, and it is possible to switch to a display based on the increase in gaming value in a timing advantageous zone that is difficult to notice.

An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is composed of a housing 1a with an open front and a front door 1b pivotally supported on the side end of the housing 1a. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel) on which multiple types of identifiable symbols are arranged in a predetermined order and in equal numbers are arranged in a horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on these reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, in a see-through window 3 provided approximately in the center of the front of the slot machine 1 so that they can be seen by the player. Also, as shown in FIG. 2, multiple types of identifiable symbols ("red 7", "white 7", "replay a", "replay b", "bell a", "bell b", "bell c", "watermelon", "cherry", and "plum") are arranged in a predetermined order on each reel.

In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is exemplified, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, or a configuration using four or more reels may also be used. Also, in this embodiment, the variable display unit that variably displays the patterns is made up of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, but the variable display unit may be something other than a reel, and may be configured, for example, to be capable of variably displaying the patterns by moving a belt having multiple patterns arranged on its outer periphery. Also, in this embodiment, the variable display unit is made up of physical reels, but the variable display unit may also be made up of an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, there are provided a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout outlet 9 from which medals are paid out, a MAXBET switch 6 operated to set the maximum bet within a range of a prescribed number of bets determined according to the game state (in this embodiment, normal game state: 3, special game state: 2) using credits (the number of medals stored as the game value owned by the player), a settlement switch 10 operated to settle the medals stored as credits and the medals used to set the bet (to return the medals used to set the credits and the bet), a start switch 7 operated to start the game, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R operated to stop the rotation of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively, and a performance switch 56 used for performance, all of which can be operated by the player.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, there is provided a game display unit 13 provided with a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, a game support indicator 12 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs, an error code indicating the content of an error when an error occurs, operation information (navigation notification) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, etc., a 1BET LED 14 that lights up to indicate that the bet number is set to 1, a 2BET LED 15 that lights up to indicate that the bet number is set to 2, a 3BET LED 16 that lights up to indicate that the bet number is set to 3, a start valid LED 18 that lights up to indicate that the start operation of the game by operating the start switch 7 is valid, a zone display LED 19 that lights up to indicate that the game zone is controlled to an advantageous zone, and a replay in progress LED 20 that lights up to indicate that a replay game is in progress.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6 is a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) that lights up to indicate that the operation to set the bet amount by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are left, center, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R (see FIG. 3) that light up to indicate that the operation to stop the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is valid.

Also, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying images is provided on the front of the slot machine 1. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel that is transparent when no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and is provided so that the display area is located in front of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (on the player's side) of the front door 1b. Each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the rear side of the liquid crystal display 51 can be seen from the player's side through the transparent area of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 that corresponds to the see-through window 3 and the see-through window 3.

On the inside of the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, there are provided a reset switch 23 that detects a reset operation to release an error state from outside the slot machine 1 by operating a specific key, a setting value display 24 that displays the setting value at that time when the setting value is being changed or checked, a door open detection switch 25 that detects the open state of the front door 1b, a flow path switching solenoid 30 that selectively switches the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 to either the hopper tank side or the medal payout outlet 9 side provided inside the slot machine 1, and a medal selector 29 having inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c that detect medals inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side.

Inside the slot machine 1, there is also provided a reel unit 34 for spinning and stopping the aforementioned reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in response to a control signal from the main control unit 41, and a hopper unit 35 for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9 in response to a control signal from the main control unit 41.

Inside the slot machine 1, there are also provided a setting key switch 37 for switching between a setting change state and a setting confirmation state, a reset/setting switch 38 which functions as a reset switch for releasing an error state under normal circumstances and functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball payout rate) of the internal lottery described below in the setting change state, and a power switch 39 which is operated when turning the power on and off.

With the gaming control board 40 attached to a predetermined position inside the cabinet 1a inside the slot machine 1, a gaming machine information display 50 consisting of a four-digit seven-segment display is disposed below the front side (player side) of the gaming control board 40 (not shown). With the gaming control board 40 sealed in the board case, the display contents of the gaming machine information display 50 can be seen from outside the board case, and the gaming machine information based on the playing history of the slot machine 1, which is compiled by the main control unit 41 and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, can be recognized by store clerks and the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and a presentation control board 90. The game is controlled by the game control board 40, and the presentation control board 90 controls the presentation according to the game status.

The game control board 40 is connected to the aforementioned MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, inserted medal sensors 31a-31c, reel sensor (not shown) of the reel unit 34, payout sensor and full sensor (not shown) of the hopper unit 35, setting key switch 37, and reset/setting switch 38, and detection signals from these connected switches are input.

The game control board 40 is also connected to the credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, start enable LED 18, section indicator LED 19, replay in progress LED 20, BET switch enable LED 21, left, middle, right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, setting value indicator 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel unit 34, and hopper unit 35. These electrical components and the game machine information indicator 50 mounted on the game control board 40 are driven under the control of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40 and described below.

The game control board 40 also includes a main control unit 41 that controls the game. The main control unit 41 includes a ROM 41b in which programs and the like are stored, and a RAM 41c in which work data is temporarily stored, and performs various controls according to the programs stored in the ROM 41b.

The main control unit 41 also transmits various commands to the sub-control unit 91. Commands transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub-control unit 91 are sent in only one direction, and no commands are sent from the sub-control unit 91 to the main control unit 41.

The performance control board 90 is connected to the aforementioned performance switch 56, and its detection signal is input. In addition, the performance control board 90 is connected to performance devices such as the aforementioned LCD display 51, a speaker capable of outputting sound, and performance LEDs 57 used for performance and visible to the player, and the output state of these performance devices can be controlled by a sub-controller 91 mounted on the performance control board 90. The sub-controller 91 receives commands sent from the main control unit 41 and detection signals from the performance switch 56, and performs various controls for producing performances.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the medal payout rate changes according to a set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using the winning probability according to the set value in a lottery that affects the player's advantage, such as an internal lottery or an AT lottery. The set value has six levels, from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

To change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, the set value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as the display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting state is changed so that the set value can be changed by operating the reset/set switch 38. When the reset/set switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by one (when the reset/set switch 38 is operated again from the set value 6, it returns to the set value 1). When the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is confirmed as the set value. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state is changed so that the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset/setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by a specific key operation, is opened, and can only be operated by staff of the game arcade where the slot machine 1 is installed who possess a specific key. In particular, the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, so that only staff of the game arcade who possess a key for operating the setting key switch 37 can operate it. The reset switch 23 does not require the front door 1b to be opened, but requires key operation using a specific key, so that only staff who possess the specific key can operate it. The reset/setting switch 38 also functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state under normal circumstances.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control unit 41 periodically performs a power outage determination process to determine whether or not a voltage drop has been detected, and if it is determined in the power outage determination process that a voltage drop has been detected, it executes a power outage process (main) to set data for determining whether or not the data in RAM 41c is normal at the next recovery.

The main control unit 41 is capable of restoring the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power outage based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, provided that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of startup. On the other hand, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at startup, it determines that there is a RAM abnormality, sets an error flag indicating a RAM abnormality in the RAM 41c, and controls the RAM to an abnormal RAM state, disabling game progress. The RAM abnormal error state is released by transitioning to a setting change state and setting a new setting value, allowing game progress to be resumed.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 detects an abnormality during gameplay, it sets an error flag in the RAM 41c indicating the type of abnormality detected, and controls the state to a general error state, disabling gameplay. The general error state is released by a reset operation using the reset switch 23 or the reset/setting switch 38, allowing gameplay to continue. In the following, when there is no need to distinguish between the RAM abnormality error state and the general error state, they will simply be referred to as the error state.

When playing a game on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted into the medal insertion section 4, or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets using credits. When a specified number of bets determined according to the game state is set, a predetermined winning line LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, it is set in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, i.e., across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle row) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 becomes valid, that is, the game can be started. Note that if medals are inserted in excess of the maximum number of medals that corresponds to the game state, the amount is added to the credits. Note that, although only one winning line is applied in this embodiment, multiple winning lines may be applied.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to make it easier to recognize that a combination of symbols that constitute a win has been lined up on the winning line LN, invalid lines LM1-6 are set up separately from the winning line LN. The invalid lines LM1-6 are not used to determine whether or not a win has been made, but rather, when a combination of symbols that constitute a win has been lined up on the winning line LN, a combination of suggestive symbols that suggests a win (for example, Bell a-Bell a-Bell a) is lined up on one of the invalid lines LM1-6, making it easier to recognize that a combination of symbols that constitute a win has been lined up on the winning line LN. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, six types of invalid lines are defined as invalid lines: an invalid line LM1 set across the symbols arranged horizontally on the upper row of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, i.e., across the symbols arranged horizontally on the lower row of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, i.e., across the symbols arranged horizontally on the lower row; an invalid line LM3 set across the symbols arranged downward to the right on the upper row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, and the lower row of reel 2R, i.e., across the symbols arranged upward to the right on the lower row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, and the upper row of reel 2R, i.e., across the symbols arranged in a small V shape on the upper row of reel 2L, the middle row of reel 2C, and the upper row of reel 2R.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotates, and the symbols on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R change continuously. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated while the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating, stop control is performed on the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, the rotation of that reel is stopped, and the symbol on that reel is derived and displayed as a display result in the see-through window 3.

In the stop control, control is performed to stop the rotation of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms (milliseconds) in this embodiment) from when each stop switch is operated, and up to four frames of symbols can be pulled in before the maximum stop delay time (190 ms) has elapsed. In other words, in the stop control, it is possible to select one symbol from the symbol displayed when stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated and the symbols four frames ahead of that, for a total of five frames (pulling-in range), and lead it to reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

In this way, in the stop control, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R are operated to stop the rotation, if the symbol constituting the winning combination that has been selected in the internal lottery described below is within a reel-in range of four frames from the symbol when the stop switch is operated, the symbol is reeled onto the winning line LN, and the rotation of the reel for which the stop switch is operated is stopped. On the other hand, if the symbol constituting the winning combination that has been selected in the internal lottery is not within the reel-in range, the symbol that does not constitute any winning combination is reeled onto the winning line LN, so that the symbol constituting the winning combination that has not been selected in the internal lottery does not stop on the winning line LN, and the rotation of the reel for which the stop switch is operated is stopped.

In addition, in the stop control, when a special role (BB in this embodiment) that involves a transition in the game state is carried over, if a small role that involves the awarding of medals is won in an internal lottery and a special role and a small role are won simultaneously, the component symbols of the winning small role are controlled to be preferentially drawn into the winning line LN within the aforementioned draw-in range, and when the component symbols of the winning small role cannot be drawn into the winning line LN, the component symbols of the winning special role are controlled to be drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game in which a special role and a small role are won simultaneously, it is difficult to make the winning special role win.

In addition, in the stop control, if a special role (BB in this embodiment) is carried over and a replay role that entails a replay is won in an internal lottery, and the special role and the replay role are both won at the same time, the constituent symbols of the winning replay role are given priority and drawn into the winning line LN. The symbols that make up the replay role on each of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are positioned within a predetermined draw-in range, and when the replay role is won, the constituent symbols of the replay role are always drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game in which a special role and a replay role are both won at the same time, the winning special role cannot be made to win.

When all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game ends. When a combination of symbols for a predetermined winning combination stops on the winning line LN as a display result on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a winning combination occurs, control according to the winning combination is performed. When a minor combination is won, a number of medals determined according to the type of combination is awarded to the player and added to the credits. When the credits reach the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). When a replay combination is won, a replay is awarded, which allows the player to play without inserting medals. When a special combination is won, the game state is switched to a special game state.

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, and ends when all the reels have stopped. Also, one unit of control for executing a game (game control) starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and ends when all the controls associated with the end of the current game are completed.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the game state, and includes a small combination accompanied by the payout of medals, a replay combination that allows the player to start the next game without the need to set a bet amount, and a special combination accompanied by a transition to a special game state. Hereinafter, the small combination and the replay combination are collectively referred to as a general combination. In order for each combination determined according to the game state to win, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for that combination. The internal lottery is determined by the main control unit 41 using random numbers to determine whether or not to allow each combination to win before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the specified number of bets set).

Of the winning flags for each role, the winning flags for the small role and the replay role are only valid in the game in which the flag is set and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special role is valid until the combination of roles permitted by the flag is achieved and is invalid in the game in which the combination of roles permitted by the flag is achieved. In other words, once a winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of roles permitted by the flag is not achieved, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game.

In addition, in the internal lottery, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (e.g., push order, operation timing), a small role or a replay role (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigation target role) that is more advantageous than when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode can be won. Navigation target roles include, for example, roles that result in a more advantageous stop mode when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode than when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode, and roles that have a higher probability of stopping an advantageous stop mode when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode than when a stop operation is performed in another operation mode. In addition, advantageous stop modes include not only stop modes that involve the awarding of medals, but also stop modes that involve a transition to an advantageous game state, and stop modes that avoid a transition to an unfavorable game state.

The main control unit 41 can control the game to an assist time (AT) state, which is a notification period during which a navigation notification can be executed, in which navigation information that can specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player is notified by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12, according to the internal lottery result. The main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT state when the right to be controlled in the AT state is granted to the player. When the game is controlled to the AT state, the navigation notification is executed by winning the navigation target role, and the navigation number indicating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player (for example, the push order, operation timing, etc.) is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command that can specify the navigation number indicating the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is sent to the sub-control unit 91, thereby executing a navigation performance that notifies the operation mode using the liquid crystal display 51, etc. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation performance, the navigation target role that was won in the internal lottery can be reliably won.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is provided with a game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the number of medals paid out, error codes, and navigation information, and is configured to notify the navigation number using the game auxiliary display 12 in controlling the navigation notification, but it may also be configured to have a dedicated display capable of displaying only the navigation number, and to notify the navigation number using the dedicated display in controlling the navigation notification.

[About game status]
The main control unit 41 can control the game state to either a normal game state or a special game state, as shown in Fig. 4. The normal game state includes a normal game state (not in the internal state) in which the BB win is not carried over, and a normal game state (in the internal state) in which the BB win is carried over.

The normal game state (non-internal) is a state in which BB has not won in the normal game state. It is a game state controlled in a state in which the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized by setting new settings by transitioning to the setting change state or the factory default state of the slot machine 1. It is also controlled to the normal game state (non-internal) when the special game state is ended. The normal game state (non-internal) continues until BB wins in the internal lottery, and ends when BB does not win in the game in which BB won in the internal lottery and transitions to the normal game state (internal), or when BB wins in the game in which BB won in the internal lottery and transitions to the special game state.

The normal game state (inside) is a state in which the BB is carried over in the normal game state. In this embodiment, when a special role and a small role are won at the same time, control is performed to prioritize the small role, and when a special role and a replay role are won at the same time, control is performed to always match the replay role, so that the BB does not win even if a small role is won in the normal game state (inside), or if a replay role is won. In the normal game state (inside), either a small role or a replay role is always won, so once the game is switched to the normal game state (inside), the BB does not win, and after the transition to the normal game state (inside), the normal game state (inside) is maintained until the setting value is newly set by transitioning to the setting change state, and the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized.

The special game state is a game state to which the player enters when BB wins a game in which BB won during the normal game state (not inside the game), and continues until a specific end condition is met (in this embodiment, the total number of medals paid out during the special game state exceeds 50), at which point the game state ends when the player enters the normal game state (not inside the game).

In this way, in this embodiment, the game will be controlled in the normal game state (inside the game), for the majority of the gameplay, so the medal payout rate is designed according to the set value (1 to 6 in this embodiment) on the assumption that the game will be controlled in the normal game state (inside the game).

[Regarding roles eligible for the internal lottery]
As shown in Figure 5, in this embodiment, in the normal game state (not in the internal play), normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong chance replay B, navigation small win, specific small win, 3 cards, BB, and BB + 3 cards are subject to internal lottery. In the normal game mode (not inside), the winning probability of normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong chance replay B, navigation small feature, specific small feature, 3 coins, BB, and BB+3 coins is set to approximately 1/9.9, approximately 1/65, approximately 1/16384, approximately 1/137, approximately 1/101, approximately 1/524, approximately 1/655, approximately 1/1.37, approximately 1/16.2, approximately 1/3449, approximately 1/16384, and approximately 1/14.6, respectively, and the probability of not winning (missing) is 0.

In addition, in the normal game mode (inside), the following three cards are subject to the internal lottery: Normal Replay A, Normal Replay B, Normal Replay C, Weak Chance Replay A, Weak Chance Replay B, Strong Chance Replay A, Strong Chance Replay B, Navigation Small Winning, and Special Small Winning. In the normal game mode (inside), the winning probability of the following three cards is set to approximately 1/9.9, approximately 1/65, approximately 1/8192, approximately 1/137, approximately 1/101, approximately 1/524, approximately 1/655, approximately 1/1.37, approximately 1/16.2, and approximately 1/14.5, respectively, and the probability of not winning (missing) is 0.

In addition, in the special game state, composite minor role A and composite minor role B are subject to an internal lottery. In the special game state, the winning probability of composite minor role A and composite minor role B is set to approximately 1/33 and approximately 1/1.2, respectively, and the probability of not winning (missing) is approximately 1/7.3.

When normal replay A is won, normal replay A will always win, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operations. When normal replay B is won, normal replay B will always win, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operations. When normal replay C is won, normal replay C will always win, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operations.

When a Weak Chance Replay A is won, Weak Chance Replay A will always win, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operation. When a Weak Chance Replay B is won, Weak Chance Replay B will always win, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operation. When a Strong Chance Replay A is won, Strong Chance Replay A will always win, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operation. When a Strong Chance Replay B is won, Strong Chance Replay B will always win, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operation.

When you win Normal Replay A, Normal Replay B, Normal Replay C, Weak Chance Replay A, Weak Chance Replay B, Strong Chance Replay A, or Strong Chance Replay B, you will be awarded a replay.

The navigation minor role is a role in which multiple minor roles (in this embodiment, a main minor role and a sub minor role) are won, and when the stopping operation of each reel is performed in the stopping operation sequence corresponding to each navigation minor role, the main minor role with the payout of eight medals is won, while when the stopping operation is performed in a stopping operation sequence other than the corresponding stopping operation sequence, the sub minor role with the payout of one medal is won depending on the timing of the stopping operation, or a loss in which no role is won. In other words, the expected number of medals awarded changes depending on the stopping operation sequence, and the expected number of medals awarded changes when the navigation number indicating the stopping operation sequence corresponding to the winning navigation minor role is announced by the navigation announcement.

The operation mode corresponding to the navigation minor prize, i.e., the operation mode for winning the main minor prize, is not limited to the stop operation sequence, and the operation mode corresponding to the navigation minor prize may be the stop operation timing of at least some of the reels, or a combination of the stop operation timing and the stop operation sequence.

A specific minor win is a win that results in multiple minor wins (in this embodiment, one of the specific minor wins A to C and one coin), and when a specific minor win is won, if the reels are stopped in a stopping operation sequence that results in the specific minor wins A, B, and C corresponding to the specific minor win, one of the specific minor wins A, B, and C will be won with the payout of eight medals, while if the reels are stopped in a stopping operation sequence that results in the win of one coin corresponding to the specific minor win, one coin will be won with the payout of one medal.

The operation mode for winning specific minor roles A, B, and C in response to specific minor roles, and the operation mode for winning one coin in response to specific minor roles are not limited to the stop operation sequence, and the operation mode for winning specific minor roles A, B, and C in response to specific minor roles, and the operation mode for winning one coin in response to specific minor roles may be the stop operation timing of at least some of the reels, or a combination of the stop operation timing and the stop operation sequence.

When three coins are won, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operation, three coins will always be paid out.

When BB is won, if the stop operation is performed at a timing that is within the reel-in range of the BB constituent symbols (in this embodiment, the combination "white 7-plum-plum") on all reels, BB will be won and the game state will transition to a special game state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed at a timing that is outside the reel-in range of the BB constituent symbols on any reel, it will result in a loss where no combination is won, and the BB win will be carried over to the next game or later, transitioning to the normal game state (inside).

BB + 3 coins is a combination in which BB and 3 coins are won. When BB + 3 coins is won, regardless of the order or timing of the stop operation, 3 coins will always be won, with the payout of 3 medals, and the BB win will be carried over to the next game or later, and the game will transition to the normal game state (internal).

Composite minor win A is a win when all main minor wins and specific minor wins A to C that make up the navigation minor win are won. When Composite minor win A is won, a specific main minor win accompanied by the payout of 8 medals will always be won, regardless of the order of the stop operation or the timing of the stop operation.

Composite minor prize B is a prize in which all the sub-minor prizes that make up the navigation minor prize, as well as 1 and 3 coins, are won. When Composite minor prize B is won, regardless of the order of the stop operation or the timing of the stop operation, 1 coin will always be won, which will result in the payout of 1 medal.

The items selected in the internal lottery (including non-winners) are Non-winner, Normal Replay A, Normal Replay B, Normal Replay C, Weak Chance Replay A, Weak Chance Replay B, Strong Chance Replay A, Strong Chance Replay B, Navigation Small Winner, Special Small Winner, 3 coins, BB, BB + 3 coins, Composite Small Winner A, and Composite Small Winner B, each of which is assigned a winning number (general win) and a winning number (special win), and the winning number (general win) and the winning number (special win) corresponding to the result of the internal lottery are set in RAM 41c.

In more detail, the winning number (general role) is assigned as 0 for all non-winners (those who did not win any general role) and BB, a special role that does not include a general role; 1 to 25 are assigned in order to the general roles Normal Replay A, Normal Replay B, Normal Replay C, Weak Chance Replay A, Weak Chance Replay B, Strong Chance Replay A, Strong Chance Replay B, Navi Small Role, Specific Small Role, 3 Cards, Composite Small Role A, and Composite Small Role B; and 23, the same as 3 cards, is assigned to BB + 3 cards, which is a general role that includes 3 cards.

The winning numbers (special roles) are assigned a 0 for non-winning (no special roles), normal replay A, normal replay B, normal replay C, weak chance replay A, weak chance replay B, strong chance replay A, strong chance replay B, navigation small role, specific small role, 3 cards, composite small role A, and composite small role B. The special role BB is assigned a 1, and BB + 3 cards, which includes the special role BB, is assigned a 1, the same as BB.

The winning number (general role) set in the winning number setting area of RAM 41c is only retained during the game in which the winning number (general role) was set, and is cleared when the game ends.

In addition, a winning number (special role) other than 0 set in the winning number setting area of RAM 41c is maintained until a special role corresponding to the winning number (special role) is won, and is cleared when the game in which the special role is won ends. In other words, once BB is won and a winning number (special role) other than 0 is set in the winning number setting area, even if the winning combination of winning numbers (special roles) cannot be completed, the winning number (special role) is not cleared and is carried over to the next game. In addition, the winning number (special role) is also cleared by switching to a setting change state.

The internal lottery targets (including non-winners) are assigned a corresponding advantageous zone transition flag of 0-4, a lottery flag 1 of 0-3, a lottery flag 2 of 0-3, and a lottery flag 3 of 0-4, and the advantageous zone transition flag and lottery flags 1-3 are set in RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery (winning number (general role)). The advantageous zone transition flag is referenced when making a decision on whether or not to transition to an advantageous zone. The lottery flags 1-3 are referenced when making a decision on whether or not to perform a lottery related to the AT state (a game number addition lottery, a win rate increase transition lottery, the first and second win rate increase lottery, the second AT lottery, the first to third additional lotteries, etc., which will be described later) and when performing a lottery related to the AT state.

The advantageous zone transition flag is assigned 0 to the lottery objects other than the advantageous zone transition role, and for the advantageous zone transition role, a common value is assigned to the lottery objects having common attributes that do not need to be distinguished when performing the lottery performed at the time of the advantageous zone transition, such as multiple types of push order roles and multiple lottery objects with similar winning probabilities. Therefore, when determining whether to transition to the advantageous zone, the main control unit 41 does not need to individually identify whether it is an advantageous zone transition role from each winning number (general role), and can identify whether it is an advantageous zone transition role or not depending on whether the advantageous zone transition flag is 0. In addition, when determining the probability according to the winning number (general role) in the lottery performed at the time of the advantageous zone transition, the probability according to the winning number (general role) is determined from the value of the advantageous zone transition flag, rather than determining the probability from each winning number (general role), and there is no need to determine the probability for each individual winning number (general role), and the probability according to the attribute of the lottery object can be determined by determining the probability for each advantageous zone transition flag, which is less than the number of types of winning numbers (general roles).

The lottery flag is assigned 0 to the lottery object that is not the object of the lottery related to the AT state, and for the lottery object that is the object of the lottery related to the granting of the AT, a common value is assigned to the lottery object having a common attribute that does not need to be distinguished when performing the lottery related to the AT state, such as multiple types of navigation small roles. Therefore, when performing the lottery related to the AT state, the main control unit 41 does not need to individually specify whether or not to perform the lottery from each winning number (general role), and can specify whether or not to perform the lottery related to the AT state depending on whether the lottery flag is 0. In addition, when specifying the probability according to the winning number (general role) in the lottery related to the AT state, the probability according to the winning number (general role) is specified from the value of the lottery flag, rather than specifying the probability from each winning number (general role), and there is no need to determine the probability for each winning number (general role), and the probability according to the attribute of the lottery object can be specified by determining the probability for each lottery flag that is less than the number of types of winning numbers (general roles). In addition, the lottery flags consist of lottery flags 1 to 3, which differ in the lottery objects that are excluded from the lottery related to the AT state and the lottery objects that have common attributes that do not need to be distinguished when conducting a lottery related to the AT state, and by using one of the lottery flags 1 to 3 depending on the type of lottery related to the AT state, the lottery objects that are excluded from the lottery related to the AT state can be made different depending on the type of lottery related to the AT state, and the probability for each lottery object that has a common attribute that does not need to be distinguished when conducting a lottery related to the AT state can be made different.

[About Navigation Small Roles, Specific Small Roles, and Composite Small Roles]
The following describes the navigation minor role, the specific minor role, and the composite minor role that are the subject of the internal lottery in the normal game state (non-internal/internal). In the following, the reel that stops first may be called the first stop reel, the reel that stops second may be called the second stop reel, and the reel that stops third may be called the third stop reel.

As shown in FIG. 6, the navigation minor symbols include left-center-right bell A, left-center-right bell B, left-right center bell A, left-right center bell B, center left-right bell A, center left-right bell B, center right-left bell A, center right-left bell B, right-left center bell A, right-left center bell B, right-center-left bell A, and right-center-left bell B.

The left, center, and right bells A are combinations that are won as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, and the top bell A is a secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the left, center, and right bells A are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the left reel, center reel, and right reel) is used, the combination of the top bell A is led to the winning line LN, and the top bell A wins. When the top bell A wins, any of bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM1. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the left, center, and right bells A are won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination will be led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any role will be led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no role wins.

The left, middle, and right bells B are combinations that are won as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, and the top bell B is a secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the left, middle, and right bells B are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel) is used, the combination of the top bell B is led to the winning line LN, and the top bell B wins. When the top bell B wins, any of bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM1. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the left, middle, and right bells B are won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination will be led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any role will be led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no role wins.

The left and right center bells A are combinations that are won as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, and a right downward bell A with a secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the left and right center bells A are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the left reel, right reel, and center reel) is used, the combination of the right downward bell A is led to the winning line LN, and the right downward bell A wins. When the right downward bell A wins, any of the bells a to c are lined up on the invalid line LM3. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the left and right center bells A are won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination is led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination wins, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any combination is led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no combination wins.

The left and right center bells B are combinations that are won as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, along with a right downward bell B and a secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the left and right center bells B are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the left reel, right reel, and center reel) is used, the right downward bell B combination is led to the winning line LN, and the right downward bell B wins. When the right downward bell B wins, any of the bells a to c are lined up on the invalid line LM3. Also, if the left and right center bells B are won in an operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination is led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination wins, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any role is led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no role wins.

The middle left and right bells A are the winning combination for the main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, and the middle bell A is the winning combination for the secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the middle left and right bells A are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the middle reel, left reel, and right reel) is used, the combination of the middle bell A is led to the winning line LN, and the middle bell A wins. When the middle bell A wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the winning line LN. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the middle left and right bells A are won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination will be led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any combination will be led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no combination wins.

The middle left and right bells B are the main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, and the middle bell B is the secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the middle left and right bells B are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the middle reel, left reel, and right reel) is used, the combination of the middle bell B is led to the winning line LN, and the middle bell B wins. When the middle bell B wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the winning line LN. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the middle left and right bells B are won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination will be led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any combination will be led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no combination wins.

The middle, right, and left bells A are combinations that are won by the right-up bell A as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, along with a secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the middle, right, and left bells A are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the middle reel, right reel, and left reel) is used, the combination of the right-up bell A is led to the winning line LN, and the right-up bell A wins. When the right-up bell A wins, any of the bells a to c are lined up on the invalid line LM4. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the middle, right, and left bells A are won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination is led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination wins, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any role is led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss in which no role wins.

The middle, right, and left bells B are combinations that are won as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, and a right-rising bell B with a secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the middle, right, and left bells B are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the middle reel, right reel, and left reel) is used, the right-rising bell B combination is led to the winning line LN, and the right-rising bell B wins. When the right-rising bell B wins, any of the bells a to c are lined up on the invalid line LM4. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the middle, right, and left bells B are won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination is led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination wins, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any combination is led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no combination wins.

The right, left, and center bells A are the winning combination that is the main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, and the lower bell A with the sub minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the right, left, and center bells A are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the right reel, left reel, and center reel) is used, the combination of the lower bell A is led to the winning line LN, and the lower bell A wins. When the lower bell A wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM2. Also, if the right, left, and center bells A are won, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used, the symbol combination of the sub minor combination will be led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the sub minor combination will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any role will be led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no role wins.

The right, left, and middle bells B are combinations that are won as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, and the lower bell B is a secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When the right, left, and middle bells B are won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the right reel, left reel, and middle reel) is used, the combination of the lower bell B is led to the winning line LN, and the lower bell B wins. When the lower bell B wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM2. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the right, left, and middle bells B are won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination will be led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any role will be led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no role wins.

Right-Centre-Left Bell A is a combination that wins as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, along with a small mountain bell A and a secondary minor combination with the payout of one medal. When Right-Centre-Left Bell A is won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the right reel, middle reel, and left reel) is used, the combination of small mountain bell A is led to the winning line LN, and small mountain bell A wins. When small mountain bell A wins, any of bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM6. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when Right-Centre-Left Bell A is won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination will be led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any role will be led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no role wins.

The Right-Center-Left Bell B is a combination that wins as a main minor combination with the payout of eight medals, along with a Small Bell B secondary combination with the payout of one medal. When the Right-Center-Left Bell B is won, if the corresponding operation mode (stop operation order of the right reel, center reel, and left reel) is used, the combination of the Small Bell B is led to the winning line LN, and the Small Bell B wins. When the Small Bell B wins, any of the bells a to c will line up on the invalid line LM6. Also, if the operation mode other than the corresponding operation mode is used when the Right-Center-Left Bell B is won, the symbol combination of the secondary minor combination will be led to the winning line LN depending on the timing of the stop operation, and the secondary minor combination will win, or a symbol combination that does not constitute any role will be led to the winning line LN, resulting in a loss where no role wins.

The main minor roles that make up the navigation minor roles, the middle bells A and B, both have bells a to c that line up on the winning line LN, but the symbol combinations that line up on the winning line LN are different. The main minor roles that make up the navigation minor roles, the upper bells A and B, both have bells a to c that line up on the invalid line LM1, but the symbol combinations that line up on the winning line LN are different. The main minor roles that make up the navigation minor roles, the lower bells A and B, both have bells a to c that line up on the invalid line LM2, but the symbol combinations that line up on the winning line LN are different. The main minor roles that make up the navigation minor roles, the downward-right bells A and B, both have bells a to c that line up on the invalid line LM3, but the symbol combinations that line up on the winning line LN are different. The main minor roles that make up the navigation minor roles, the upward-right bells A and B, both have bells a to c that line up on the invalid line LM4, but the symbol combinations that line up on the winning line LN are different. In addition, of the main minor symbols that make up the navigation minor symbol, Koyama Bell A and B are both lining up with any of Bells a to c on the invalid line LM6, but the symbol combinations that line up on the winning line LN are different.

The left specific minor win is a win in which a specific minor win A with a payout of 8 medals is won together with one with a payout of 1 medal. When the left specific minor win is won, if the first reel is operated as the left reel (stop operation order of the left reel, center reel, and right reel, or stop operation order of the left reel, right reel, and center reel), a symbol combination of one coin is drawn to the winning line LN, and one coin is won. When the left specific minor win is won, if the first reel is operated as the middle reel or the right reel (stop operation order of the middle reel, left reel, and right reel, stop operation order of the middle reel, right reel, and left reel, stop operation order of the right reel, left reel, and center reel, or stop operation order of the right reel, center reel, and left reel), a symbol combination of the specific minor win A is drawn to the winning line LN, and the specific minor win A is won.

The medium specific minor role is a role in which a specific minor role B accompanied by the payout of eight medals is won together with one medal accompanied by the payout of one medal. When a medium specific minor role is won, if the first reel is operated in an operation mode in which the center reel is the center reel (the stop operation sequence of the center reel, left reel, and right reel, or the stop operation sequence of the center reel, right reel, and left reel), a symbol combination of one is drawn to the winning line LN, and one is won. When a medium specific minor role is won, if the first reel is operated in an operation mode in which the left reel or right reel is the left reel or right reel (the stop operation sequence of the left reel, center reel, and right reel, the stop operation sequence of the left reel, right reel, and center reel, the stop operation sequence of the right reel, left reel, and center reel, or the stop operation sequence of the right reel, center reel, and left reel), a symbol combination of the specific minor role B is drawn to the winning line LN, and the specific minor role B is won.

The right specific minor role is a role in which a specific minor role C with a payout of eight medals is won together with one with a payout of one medal. When the right specific minor role is won, if the first reel is operated as the right reel (stop operation order of the right reel, left reel, and center reel, or stop operation order of the right reel, center reel, and left reel), a combination of one symbol is led to the winning line LN, and one symbol is won. When the right specific minor role is won, if the first reel is operated as the left reel or center reel (stop operation order of the left reel, center reel, and right reel, stop operation order of the left reel, right reel, and center reel, stop operation order of the center reel, left reel, and right reel, or stop operation order of the center reel, right reel, and left reel), a combination of symbols of the specific minor role C is led to the winning line LN, and the specific minor role C is won. The specific small prizes A, B, and C all involve the payout of eight medals, but the symbol combinations that line up on the winning line LN are different.

Composite minor prize A is a prize in which all the main minor prizes that make up the navigation minor prize, namely the upper bells A and B, middle bells A and B, lower bells A and B, downward right bells A and B, upward right bells A and B, small mountain bells A and B, and specific minor prizes A, B, and C, are simultaneously won. When composite minor prize A is won, regardless of the order of the stopping operations or the timing of the stopping operations, one of the symbol combinations of middle bells A and B, which is accompanied by the payout of eight medals, will always be led to the winning line LN, and one of the middle bells A and B will win.

Composite minor prize B is a prize in which all the sub-minor prizes that make up the navigation minor prize, as well as 1 and 3 coins, are won. When Composite minor prize B is won, regardless of the stop operation order or the stop operation timing, a single symbol combination that accompanies the payout of one medal is always derived to the winning line LN, and one medal is won.

[Regarding control related to navigation small roles, specific small roles, and composite small roles]
After the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command capable of identifying the result of the internal lottery to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 determines the content of the presentation according to the result of the internal lottery identified from the internal winning command, and executes the presentation according to the determined content of the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 6, when a navigation minor prize is won in an internal lottery, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 an internal winning command indicating the winning number (general prize) 8 common to all navigation minor prizes, regardless of the type of navigation minor prize or the corresponding operation mode, whether a navigation notification is performed or not, that is, an internal winning command that makes it possible to identify that a navigation minor prize has been won but does not allow the corresponding operation mode to be identified.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the left-center-right bell A or the left-center-right bell B wins and a navigation notification is issued, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number "1" on the game aid display 12, thereby issuing a navigation notification that encourages the player to stop the left reel, center reel, and right reel in the stopping operation order (left-center-right), i.e., in the operation mode that will win the main minor prize.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6, if either the left/right center bell A or the left/right center bell B wins and a navigation notification is issued, the navigation number "2" is displayed on the game aid display 12, and a navigation notification is issued to encourage the player to stop the left reel, right reel, and center reel in the stopping operation order (left/right/center), that is, in the operation mode that will win the main minor prize.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6, if either the center left/right bell A or the center left/right bell B wins and a navigation notification is issued, the navigation number "3" is displayed on the game assistance display 12, and a navigation notification is issued to encourage the player to stop the center reel, left reel, and right reel in the stopping operation order (center left/right), that is, in the operation mode that will win the main minor prize.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6, if either center right left bell A or center right left bell B wins and a navigation notification is issued, the navigation number "4" is displayed on the game aid display 12, and a navigation notification is issued to encourage the player to stop the center reel, right reel, and left reel in the stopping operation order (center right left), that is, in the operation mode that will win the main minor prize.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6, if either the right-left-center bell A or the right-left-center bell B wins and a navigation notification is issued, the navigation number "5" is displayed on the game aid display 12, and a navigation notification is issued to encourage the player to stop the right reel, left reel, and center reel in the stopping operation order (right, left, center), that is, in the operation mode that will win the main minor prize.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6, if either the right-center-left bell A or the right-center-left bell B wins and a navigation notification is issued, the navigation number "6" is displayed on the game aid display 12, and a navigation notification is issued to encourage the player to stop the right reel, center reel, and left reel in the stopping operation order (right-center-left), that is, in the operation mode that will win the main minor prize.

In this way, even if the type of navigation minor prize is different, if a navigation minor prize that has a common operation mode for winning the main minor prize is won, a common navigation notification will be given.

In addition, when the main control unit 41 does not perform a navigation notification when a navigation minor wins, after sending an internal winning command, it sends a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "0", which does not identify the operation mode corresponding to the navigation minor win, while, as shown in FIG. 6, when either the left-center-right bell A or the left-center-right bell B is won to perform a navigation notification, it sends to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "1", which indicates that the corresponding stop operation order is left-center-right, when either the left-right-center bell A or the left-right-center bell B is won to perform a navigation notification, it sends to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "2", which indicates that the corresponding stop operation order is left-center, when either the center-left-right bell A or the center-left-right bell B is won to perform a navigation notification, it sends to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "3", which indicates that the corresponding stop operation order is left-right-center, when either the center-left-right bell A or the center-left-right bell B is won to perform a navigation notification, The sub-control unit 91 is sent a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "3" indicating that the stop operation sequence is center left or right, and if either center right left bell A or center right left bell B is selected to perform a navigation notification, the sub-control unit 91 is sent a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "4" indicating that the corresponding stop operation sequence is center right or left, and if either right left center bell A or right left center bell B is selected to perform a navigation notification, the sub-control unit 91 is sent a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "5" indicating that the corresponding stop operation sequence is right left center, and if either right center left bell A or right center left bell B is selected to perform a navigation notification, the sub-control unit 91 is sent a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "6" indicating that the corresponding operation mode is right center left.

In this way, even if the type of navigation minor win is different, if a navigation minor win that corresponds to the same stop operation sequence is won, a common navigation command is sent to the sub-control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 6, when any of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 an internal winning command indicating the winning number (general role) 20 common to all specific minor roles regardless of the type of specific minor role, whether or not a navigation notification is performed, i.e., an internal winning command that can identify that a specific minor role has been won but cannot identify the type of specific minor role, the operation mode for winning one coin, or the operation mode for winning any of the specific minor roles A, B, or C, regardless of the type of specific minor role.

As shown in FIG. 6, when the left specific minor win is generated and a navigation notification is issued in the normal state and CZ/AT precursor states described below, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number "7" on the game auxiliary display 12 to prompt the player to perform the first stop of the left reel, i.e., a stop operation in an operation mode that will win one coin, and when the left specific minor win is generated and a navigation notification is issued in the CZ state and AT state described below, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number "3" on the game auxiliary display 12 to prompt the player to perform the stop operation in the stop operation order (center left and right) of the center reel, left reel, and right reel, i.e., a stop operation in one of the multiple operation modes that will win the specific minor win A.

As shown in FIG. 6, when a medium specific minor win is generated and a navigation notification is issued in the normal state and CZ/AT precursor states described below, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number "8" on the game auxiliary display 12 to prompt the player to perform the first stop of the center reel, i.e., a stop operation in an operation mode that will win one coin, and when a medium specific minor win is generated and a navigation notification is issued in the CZ state and AT state described below, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number "5" on the game auxiliary display 12 to prompt the player to perform the stop operation in the stop operation order of the right reel, left reel, and center reel (right, left, center), i.e., a stop operation in one of the multiple operation modes that will win the specific minor win B.

As shown in FIG. 6, when the right specific minor win is generated and a navigation notification is issued in the normal state and the CZ/AT precursor state described below, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number "9" on the game auxiliary display 12 to prompt the player to perform the first stop of the right reel, i.e., a stop operation in an operation mode that will win one coin, and when the right specific minor win is generated and a navigation notification is issued in the CZ state and the AT state described below, the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number "1" on the game auxiliary display 12 to prompt the player to perform the stop operation in the stop operation order of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel (left, center, right), i.e., a stop operation in one of the multiple operation modes that will win the specific minor win C.

In this way, the stop operation sequence for winning a specific small role A when the left specific small role is won includes the stop operation sequence for winning a main small role when the center left and right bells A and B are won, and a common navigation notification is performed when the left specific small role is won in the CZ state and the AT state and the operation mode for winning a specific small role A is notified, and when the center left and right bells A and B are won in the CZ state and the AT state and the operation mode for winning a main small role is notified. Also, the stop operation sequence for winning a specific small role B when the center specific small role is won includes the stop operation sequence for winning a main small role when the right left and center bells A and B are won, and a common navigation notification is performed when the center specific small role is won in the CZ state and the AT state and the operation mode for winning a specific small role B is notified, and when the right left and center bells A and B are won in the CZ state and the AT state and the operation mode for winning a main small role is notified. In addition, the stop operation sequence for winning the specific minor role C when the right specific minor role is won includes the stop operation sequence for winning the main minor role when the left, center, and right bells A and B are won, and a common navigation notification is given when an operation mode for winning the specific minor role C is notified when the right specific minor role is won in the CZ state and AT state, and when an operation mode for winning the main minor role is notified when the left, center, and right bells A and B are won in the CZ state and AT state.

When the main control unit 41 does not perform navigation notification when any of the specific minor roles is won, it sends an internal winning command, and then sends a navigation command that can identify the navigation number "0" which does not identify which one has been won. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6, in the normal state and CZ/AT precursor state described below, when the left specific minor role is won and navigation notification is performed, it sends to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation command that can identify the navigation number "7" indicating that the corresponding stop operation sequence is to stop the left reel first. When the center specific minor role is won and navigation notification is performed, it sends to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation command that can identify the navigation number "8" indicating that the corresponding stop operation sequence is to stop the center reel first. When the right specific minor role is won and navigation notification is performed, it sends to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation command that can identify the navigation number "9" indicating that the corresponding stop operation sequence is to stop the right reel first.

In addition, in the CZ state and AT state described below, if a left specific minor win is won and a navigation notification is performed, a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "3" indicating that the corresponding stop operation order is center, left, right, is sent to the sub-control unit 91, if a middle specific minor win is won and a navigation notification is performed, a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "5" indicating that the corresponding stop operation order is right, left, center is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and if a right specific minor win is won and a navigation notification is performed, a navigation command capable of identifying the navigation number "1" indicating that the corresponding stop operation order is left, center, right is sent to the sub-control unit 91.

In this way, a common navigation command is sent to the sub-control unit 91 when an operation mode in which a left specific small role is won and a specific small role A is won in the CZ state and AT state, and when an operation mode in which the center left and right bells A and B are won and a main small role is won in the CZ state and AT state, a common navigation command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. Also, when an operation mode in which a center specific small role is won and a specific small role B is won in the CZ state and AT state, and when an operation mode in which the right left and center bells A and B are won and a main small role is won in the CZ state and AT state, a common navigation command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. Also, when an operation mode in which a right specific small role is won and a specific small role C is won in the CZ state and AT state, and when an operation mode in which the left center right bells A and B are won and a main small role is won in the CZ state and AT state, a common navigation command is sent to the sub-control unit 91.

[About the probability of winning the Navigation Small Winning Role, the Specific Small Winning Role, and the Small Winning Role that Composes the Composite Small Winning Role]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, in the normal gaming state (non-inner middle/inner middle), the winning probability of left-center-right bell A that wins the top bell A, the winning probability of left-center-right bell B that wins the top bell B, the winning probability of left-center-right bell A that wins the right-downward bell A, the winning probability of left-center-right bell B that wins the right-downward bell B, the winning probability of middle-left-right bell A that wins the middle bell A, the winning probability of middle-left-right bell B that wins the middle bell B, the winning probability of middle-right-left bell A that wins the right-upward bell A, and the winning probability of right-upward bell B. The winning probability of a winning middle, right, or left bell B, the winning probability of a winning right and left middle bell A that wins the lower bell A, the winning probability of a winning right and left middle bell B that wins the lower bell B, the winning probability of a winning right and left bell A that wins the small mountain bell A, and the winning probability of a winning right and left middle bell B that wins the small mountain bell B are all 4000/65536, and the winning probability of a left specific small role that wins a specific small role A, the winning probability of a middle specific small role that wins a specific small role B, and the winning probability of a middle specific small role that wins a specific small role C are all 1345/65536.

In addition, in the special game state, the winning probability of composite minor role A, in which all main minor roles, i.e. upper bells A and B, middle bells A and B, lower bells A and B, downward right bells A and B, upward right bells A and B, small mountain bells A and B, and specific minor roles A, B, and C, is won, is 4001/65536, which is set higher than the winning probability (4000/65536) of each of the main minor roles in the normal game state (non-inside/inside).

In addition, the probability of winning the main minor role in the special game state (4001/65536) is set lower than the probability of winning any of the main minor roles in the normal game state (not inside/inside) (48000/65536). In other words, the probability of winning each of the main minor roles in the normal game state (not inside/inside) is set lower than the probability of winning the main minor role in the special game state, but the probability of winning the main minor role in the special game state is set lower than the probability of winning any of the main minor roles in the normal game state (not inside/inside).

For this reason, for example, if there is only one type of main minor role that can be won in a navigation minor role that corresponds to the same operation mode, the probability of winning each of the main minor roles in the normal game state (not inside, inside) will be high, and if the probability of winning the main minor role in the special game state is set higher than that, the probability of winning the main minor role in the special game state will be relatively high. However, in this embodiment, in a configuration in which the probability of winning the main minor role in the special game state is set higher than the probability of winning each of the main minor roles in the normal game state (not inside, inside), by setting multiple types of main minor roles (two types in this embodiment) that can be won in a navigation minor role that corresponds to the same operation mode, the probability of winning each of the main minor roles in the normal game state (not inside, inside) will decrease, and it will be possible to decrease the probability of winning the main minor role in the special game state accordingly.

In addition, the probability of winning specific minor roles A, B, and C in the normal game state (not inside/inside) is 1345/65536, respectively, which is set lower than the probability of winning each of the main minor roles in the normal game state (not inside/inside) (4000/65536). For this reason, the probability of winning the left, center, and right specific minor roles, which have a 2/3 probability of winning 8 medals, is not excessively high.

In addition, the probability of winning composite minor win A, in which all main minor wins and specific minor wins A, B, and C are won in the special game state, is 4001/65536, which is higher than the probability of winning each of the main minor wins in the normal game state (not inside/inside) (4000/65536) and is set higher than the probability of winning each of the specific minor wins A, B, and C in the normal game state (not inside/inside) (1345/65536).

In addition, the probability of winning the main minor role in the special game state (4001/65536) and the probability of winning the specific minor roles A, B, and C in the special game state (4001/65536) are set lower than the probability of winning the main minor role or the specific minor roles A, B, and C in the normal game state (52035/65536) in the normal game state (not inside/inside). In other words, the probability of winning the main minor role and the specific minor roles A, B, and C in the normal game state (not inside/inside) is set lower than the probability of winning the main minor role and the specific minor roles A, B, and C in the special game state, but the probability of winning the main minor role and the specific minor roles A, B, and C in the special game state is set lower than the probability of winning any of the main minor roles and the specific minor roles A, B, and C in the normal game state (not inside/inside).

In addition, if there is only one type of specific minor role, the probability of winning the specific minor role in the normal game state (not inside/inside) is high, and if the probability of winning the specific minor role or main minor role in the special game state is set higher than that, the probability of winning the specific minor role or main minor role in the special game state will be relatively high. However, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the specific minor role and main minor role in the special game state is set higher than the probability of winning the specific minor role in the normal game state (not inside/inside). By setting multiple types of specific minor roles (three types in this embodiment), the individual probability of winning specific minor roles A, B, and C in the normal game state (not inside/inside) is reduced, and it is possible to reduce the probability of winning specific minor roles A, B, and C and the main minor role in the special game state accordingly.

[About the game area]
As shown in FIG. 9, the main control unit 41 is capable of controlling the gaming area to be either a normal area or an advantageous area.

The normal zone is a game zone in which no navigation notification is given, and begins when the next game is started after the advantageous zone ends. After that, the normal zone ends in a game in which a role that transitions to an advantageous zone is won in an internal lottery in a game controlled to a game state other than the special game state. In the normal zone, the zone display LED 19 is always controlled to be off.

The advantageous zone is a game zone in which a navigation notification may be performed, and is a game zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone because a navigation notification may be executed. The advantageous zone begins when an internal lottery is won to determine that a transition to the advantageous zone will occur in a game controlled to a game state other than a special game state in a game in the normal zone, and the next game is started. The advantageous zone then ends when the end conditions for the advantageous zone (end conditions 1 to 3 described below) are met. The main control unit 41 turns on the zone display LED 19 at the start of the advantageous zone, making it possible for the player to recognize that they are in the advantageous zone. The main control unit 41 then turns off the zone display LED 19 when the advantageous zone ends, ending the zone display.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts notifying the player that the game is in an advantageous zone by turning on the zone display LED 19 at the start of the game when the advantageous zone starts, but the main control unit 41 may start notifying the player that the game is in an advantageous zone by turning on the zone display LED 19 at the start of a game in which the medal payout rate (number of medals paid out/number of bets) may exceed 100% by first issuing a navigation notification after the advantageous zone starts.

In the advantageous zone, if a specific notification condition is met (in this embodiment, the advantageous zone is controlled, and the navigation target role or specific minor role is won in an internal lottery), a navigation notification can be issued, and the player is notified of the operation mode of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player.

When the main control unit 41 is controlling the advantageous zone and the navigation target role is selected in the internal lottery, it can control the navigation notification (such as control to display the navigation number on the game assistance display 12, control to send a navigation command that can identify the navigation number, etc.) to notify the player of the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player, and the advantageous zone is a game zone that is more advantageous to the player than the normal zone.

The conditions for ending the advantageous zone include End Condition 1, which is met when the number of games in the advantageous zone (advantageous zone game number) reaches a first specified number (1500 games in this embodiment) set as the upper limit number of games, End Condition 2, which is met when the net increase in the number of medals after the increase or decrease in the number of medals in the advantageous zone changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, exceeds a second specified number (2400 in this embodiment) set as the upper limit number, and End Condition 3, which is met when a predetermined arbitrary condition is met (in this embodiment, the CZ state ends without transitioning to the AT state, and the end condition of the AT state is met), and the advantageous zone ends when at least one of End Conditions 1 to 3 is met.

In this embodiment, when the gaming zone is controlled to the normal zone, the gaming zone is transitioned to the favorable zone by winning a predetermined favorable zone transition role. However, when the gaming zone is controlled to the normal zone, a favorable zone transition lottery is held by winning a favorable zone transition lottery target role in an internal lottery, and the gaming zone is transitioned to the favorable zone by winning the favorable zone transition lottery.

[Initialization due to setting changes]
Next, the initialization of the game state and the game section accompanying the setting change will be described. When the main control unit 41 transitions to the setting change state, it initializes a part of the area stored in the RAM 41c. At this time, the information on the game state and the information on the game section are initialized.

The information regarding the game state includes a game state flag indicating the game state and a BB winning flag, and by initializing the information regarding the game state upon transition to the setting change state, regardless of whether the game state before transitioning to the setting change state was the normal game state (not inside), the normal game state (inside), or the special game state, the game state flag and the BB winning flag are initialized and the game is controlled to the normal game state (not inside).

In addition, the information regarding the game zone includes a favorable zone flag that indicates a favorable zone, and the information regarding the game zone is initialized upon transition to the setting change state, so that whether the game zone before transitioning to the setting change state was a normal zone or a favorable zone, the favorable zone flag is initialized and the game zone is controlled to the normal zone.

In addition, the information regarding the game zone includes information related to the AT state (such as information related to the advantageous zone state described below), and by initializing the information regarding the game zone upon transition to the setting change state, whether the game zone before transitioning to the setting change state was a normal zone or an advantageous zone, the information related to the AT state is initialized and the information related to the previous AT state is not carried over.

[Main processing]
The control content of the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. The main processing is repeatedly executed for each unit of play. One cycle of the main processing corresponds to one unit of the game.

As shown in FIG. 8, the main control unit 41 first performs a game start waiting process (Sa1) to carry out processing from the end of control of the previous game to starting the next game. In the game start waiting process, a process is carried out to set the number of bets in response to the insertion of medals, etc., and when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the specified number of bets set, a process is carried out to start the next game.

Next, when the game starts, an internal lottery process (Sa2) is performed to determine whether or not a winning combination is allowed to occur (internal lottery). In the internal lottery process, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not a winning combination is allowed to occur (i.e., whether or not derivation of a display result is allowed) based on preset setting values (1-6) in the slot machine 1 and a random number value for the internal lottery obtained simultaneously with the start of the game by detecting the start switch 7. Then, a winning number corresponding to the winning combination (0 in the case of a loss) is stored in a specified area of the RAM 41c so that the winning result of the internal lottery can be identified.

Next, a favorable zone transition flag generation process (Sa3) is performed to convert the winning number into a favorable zone transition flag, and a lottery flag generation process (Sa4) is performed to convert the winning number into a lottery flag. In the favorable zone transition flag generation process, a favorable zone transition flag conversion table is used to obtain the value of the favorable zone transition flag corresponding to the winning number, and this is stored in a specified area of RAM 41c. In addition, in the lottery flag generation process, a lottery flag conversion table is used to obtain the values of lottery flags 1 to 3 corresponding to the winning number, and these are each stored in a specified area of RAM 41c.

Next, a ball output control process (Sa5) is performed at the start of play, which performs processing related to the play zone and processing related to the navigation notification at the timing when play begins. In the processing related to the play zone, processing to transition to the advantageous zone is performed when a favorable zone transition role is won in the normal zone, and in the processing related to the navigation notification, processing related to transition from the normal state to the CZ/AT precursor state, transition from the CZ/AT precursor state to the CZ state or AT state, transition from the CZ state to the AT state, and management of the AT state is performed in the advantageous zone, which will be described later. In particular, in the advantageous zone, the first AT lottery, mode lottery, specified number of games lottery, first win rate increase lottery, second AT lottery, second add-on lottery, and third add-on lottery, which will be described later, are performed in the advantageous zone depending on the result of the internal lottery and the advantageous zone state.

Next, a game start command transmission process (Sa6) is performed to identify that a game has started, and a group of control state commands including a number of commands that can identify various control states at the start of a game is set in a command queue and sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

Next, after the game start command transmission process, a freeze process (Sa7) is performed to control the freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time. In the freeze process, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to control the game to the freeze state when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, and if it is determined that it has been decided to control the game to the freeze state, the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period of time. In addition, when a reel effect that changes the reels is performed in the freeze state, a process is performed to change the reels in a change mode according to the type of reel effect.

Next, after the freeze process is completed, a game start setting process (Sa8) is performed to set the predetermined start time of the reel rotation. In the game start setting process, the reel rotation start process associated with the start of the game is performed, and the reel starts rotating toward a constant speed rotation.

Next, after the game start setting process, external signal processing at the start of rotation (Sa9) is performed to output an external output signal at the start of rotation (such as a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used in the game) from a specified output port to external devices such as a call lamp, hall computer, and test device.

Next, after external signal processing at the start of rotation, a reel stop process (Sa10) is performed to control the stopping of the reels. In the reel stop process, if a navigation notification is performed, the game aid display 12 notifies the operation mode corresponding to the winning number. Furthermore, if all reels are rotating at a constant speed, acceptance of a stop operation for the rotating reels is enabled, and the system waits until the player performs a reel stop operation. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel for which a stop operation is enabled, reel stop control is performed to stop the reel for which a valid stop operation has been performed. This reel stop control is repeatedly performed for the rotating reels, and the reel stop process is terminated when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

Next, after the reel stopping process, a winning search process (Sa11) is performed. In the winning search process, a winning symbol combination is searched for based on the symbol combination stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a winning flag indicating whether or not a win has been made and the number of medals to be paid out in response to the win are set in a specified area of RAM 41c.

Next, after the winning search process, a gaming history used to calculate the gaming machine information to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 is compiled, and a gaming machine information calculation process (Sa12) is performed to calculate the gaming machine information. The gaming machine information includes the payout ratio of special features since the gaming machine was shipped (total number of medals paid out in special feature games since the gaming machine was shipped/total number of medals paid out since the gaming machine was shipped), the payout ratio of special features during a specified period (past 6000 games) (total number of medals paid out in special feature games during a specified period/total number of medals paid out during a specified period), the payout ratio of consecutive special features since the gaming machine was shipped (total number of medals paid out in special feature games during a specified period/total number of medals paid out since the gaming machine was shipped), the payout ratio of consecutive special features during a specified period (past 6000 games) (total number of medals paid out in special feature games during a specified period/total number of medals paid out during a specified period), and the payout ratio of special features with instructions since the gaming machine was shipped. (total number of medals paid out in games in which a navigation notification has been made since the gaming machine was shipped/total number of medals paid out since the gaming machine was shipped), instruction-included device payout ratio for a specified period (past 6000 games) (total number of medals paid out in games in which a navigation notification has been made during a specified period/total number of medals paid out during a specified period), medal payout rate since the gaming machine was shipped (total number of medals paid out since the gaming machine was shipped/total number of medals used during a specified period), medal payout rate for a specified period (total number of medals paid out during a specified period/total number of medals used during a specified period), etc. In the gaming machine information calculation process, the playing history used to calculate the gaming machine information is tallied, and the gaming machine information is calculated based on the tallied results.

Next, a special game state end check process (Sa13) is performed. In the special game state end check process, if the game is controlled to the special game state, it is determined whether or not the end condition is met. Next, a game state setting process (Sa14) is performed. In the game state setting process, the game state of the next game is set based on the winning data set by the winning search process and the results of the special game state end check process.

Next, a ball output control process (Sa15) at the end of play is performed, which performs processing related to the play area and processing related to the navigation notification at the timing when the game ends. In the processing related to the play area, a process to transition to the normal area is performed when the end condition of the favorable area is met in the favorable area, and in the processing related to the navigation notification, processing related to the transition from the normal state to the CZ/AT precursor state, the transition from the CZ/AT precursor state to the CZ state or AT state, the transition from the CZ state to the AT state, the transition from the CZ state or AT state to the normal state, and the management of the AT state is performed in the favorable area. In particular, in the favorable area, a game number addition lottery, a second win rate increase lottery, and a first additional lottery, which will be described later, are performed depending on the result of the internal lottery and the favorable area state.

Next, a game end command transmission process (Sa16) is performed to set a group of control state commands, including multiple commands that can specify various control states at the end of one game, in a command queue and transmit them sequentially to the sub-control unit 91.

Next, after the end-of-game command transmission process, a payout process is performed to award a number of medals according to the winnings that have occurred as a result of the game (Sa17). In the payout process, a predetermined number of medals is awarded to the player for each winning that has occurred according to the winnings, and the number of medals awarded is added to the credits. When the credits reach the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the medals that have not been added to the credits are paid out from the medal payout opening 9.

Next, after the payout process, external signal processing at the end of the game (Sa18) is performed, which outputs an external output signal at the end of the game (such as a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals awarded) from a specified output port to external devices such as a call lamp, hall computer, or test device.

Next, a game end setting process is performed (Sa19). In the game end setting process, it is determined whether or not the replay symbol combination has stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and if the replay symbol combination has stopped, the process of setting the number of bets to replay in the next game, setting the replay flag in a specified area of RAM 41c, controlling the replay LED 20 to the ON state (lighted state), etc. is performed.

Next, advantageous zone end processing is performed (Sa20). In the advantageous zone end processing, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone end flag, which indicates that the advantageous zone is to end, is set in a specified area of RAM 41c, and if it is determined that the advantageous zone end flag is set, advantageous zone data initialization processing is performed to initialize a specified area in the memory area of RAM 41c in which data related to the control of the advantageous zone is stored, and to end the advantageous zone. As a result, if the zone display LED 19 is in a lit state, it is turned off.

Next, after the advantageous zone end processing, an initialization process (Sa21) is performed. In the initialization process, the area of RAM 41c to be initialized in the game is set, and the data stored in the set area is initialized. Then, after the initialization process, the process returns to Sa1.

Then, steps Sa1 to Sa21 are repeated. When the main process is completed, the process related to the control of one unit of game is completed, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

[About the flow from normal section to AT state]
Next, a flow in which the main control unit 41 controls the transmission from the normal section to the AT state will be described with reference to FIG.

When a favorable zone transition role is selected by an internal lottery during a game played within the normal zone, the main control unit 41 transitions to the favorable zone from the next game. In the favorable zone, the game is controlled to multiple types of favorable zone states, including normal states (normal, win rate increase omen, win rate increase, win rate increase false omen, CZ/AT false omen), CZ/AT omen state, CZ (chance zone) state, and AT state (first AT state, second AT state, ED state).

As shown in FIG. 10, the normal state includes normal general, win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, false win rate increase premonition, and CZ/AT false premonition. Regardless of whether it is normal general, win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, false win rate increase premonition, or CZ/AT false premonition, no navigation notification is given when a navigation minor win is won, and when a specific minor win is won, a navigation notification is given to notify the player of the operation mode to win one coin, which is a relatively unfavorable state for the player.

The CZ/AT precursor state is entered after the normal state ends, and no navigation notification is given when a navigation minor wins, but instead, when a specific minor win occurs, a navigation notification is given to inform the player of the operation mode to win one coin. After that, the state will always transition to the CZ state or the AT state within 3 to 5 games, and in this respect it is a more advantageous state for the player than the normal state.

The CZ state is entered after the CZ/AT precursor state ends, and when a navigation minor win is made, a navigation notification is issued to notify the player of the operation mode to win the main minor win, and when a specific minor win is made, a navigation notification is issued to notify the player of the operation mode to win specific minor wins A to C. This is a state in which the player can enter the AT state, and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the CZ/AT precursor state.

The AT state is entered after the CZ/AT precursor state or the CZ state ends. The AT state includes the first AT state, the second AT state, and the ED state. In the first AT state, the second AT state, and the ED state, a navigation notification is made to notify the player of the operation mode for winning the main minor prize when a navigation minor prize is won, and a navigation notification is made to notify the operation mode for winning specific minor prizes A to C when a specific minor prize is won, and this is the most advantageous state for the player in the advantageous zone.

As shown in FIG. 9, when a favorable zone transition role is won in the normal zone and a transition to the favorable zone occurs, the main control unit 41 performs a first AT lottery, a mode lottery, and a specified number of games lottery. In the first AT lottery, it is determined whether or not to transition to the AT state after the end of the CZ/AT precursor state after the normal state, and when transitioning from the normal zone to the favorable zone, there is a probability of about 1/10 that the transition to the AT state will be won. In the mode lottery, the mode of the normal state that will be controlled thereafter is determined. In the specified number of games lottery, the specified number of games is determined from multiple game numbers (in this embodiment, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250) depending on the mode determined in the mode lottery. In this embodiment, the ceiling is 250 games, which is the maximum value that can be set as the specified number of games.

There are three modes in the normal state: Modes A, B, and C. In Mode A, the maximum number of specified games determined by the specified number of games lottery is 100 games, and the average number of specified games determined is 50 games. In Mode B, the maximum number of specified games determined by the specified number of games lottery is 200 games, and the average number of specified games determined is 150 games. In Mode C, the maximum number of specified games determined by the specified number of games lottery is 250 games, and the average number of specified games determined is 200 games. In the normal state, regardless of the mode, when the number of normal games updated in the normal state becomes equal to or greater than the specified number of games determined by the specified number of games lottery (number of normal games ≧ specified number of games), the normal state ends and the state transitions to the CZ/AT precursor state.

In the normal state, the main control unit 41 can execute a game number addition lottery, a win rate increase transition lottery, a first win rate increase lottery, and a CZ/AT false omen lottery, and depending on the winning results of these, not only does the progress of the normal state change, but the degree of advantage in the subsequent CZ state can also change.

In the normal state, the main control unit 41 adds one to the normal game number for each game, regardless of whether it is normal, win rate up sign, win rate up, win rate up false sign, or CZ/AT false sign. Also, as shown in FIG. 10, when the set lottery flag 2 is "3", that is, when a specific small role is won and one coin is awarded, regardless of whether it is normal, win rate up sign, win rate up, win rate up false sign, or CZ/AT false sign, the main control unit 41 executes a game number addition lottery. The game number addition lottery determines the number of games to be added in addition to adding one to the normal game number for each game in the normal state, and the number of games to be added to the normal game number is determined from 1 to 10, with the average being 5 games. On the other hand, when a specific small role is won and one of the specific small roles A, B, or C is awarded, regardless of whether it is normal, win rate up sign, win rate up, win rate up false sign, or CZ/AT false sign, the game number addition lottery is not executed.

In addition, in the normal state, when the lottery flag 2 is set to 1 or 2 when the number of normal games does not exceed the specified number of games (number of normal games≦specified number of games), regardless of whether it is normal general, win rate increase premonition, false win rate increase premonition, or CZ/AT false premonition, the main control unit 41 executes a win rate increase transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a win rate increase, that is, when either weak chance replay A or B or strong chance replay A or B is won. In addition, in the win rate increase transition lottery, if it is decided not to transition to a win rate increase, it further determines whether or not to transition to a win rate increase false premonition.

In addition, in the normal state, when the lottery flag 2 is set to 1 or 2 when the number of normal games exceeds the specified number of games (number of normal games > specified number of games), whether it is a win rate increase premonition or a win rate increase false premonition, i.e., when either weak chance replay A, B or strong chance replay A, B is won, or when either weak chance replay A, B or strong chance replay A, B is won regardless of whether the number of normal games exceeds the specified number of games in the win rate increase state, the main control unit 41 executes a first win rate increase lottery to determine whether or not to increase the probability of winning the second AT lottery described below.

In addition, in the normal state, the main control unit 41 executes a CZ/AT false omen lottery to determine whether to transition to a CZ/AT false omen when the number of normal games reaches any of 50, 100, 150, or 200 games that can be won in the specified number of games lottery and the number of games won in the specified number of games lottery has not been reached, for example, when 200 was won in the specified number of games lottery, regardless of whether it is normal general, win rate up omen, win rate up, win rate up false omen, or CZ/AT false omen, and the number of normal games has reached 50, 100, or 150 games, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the main control unit 41 transitions to the advantageous zone, it first controls the normal general state. In the normal general state, the effects corresponding to the normal general state are executed, and a lottery for transitioning to an increased win rate, a lottery for adding the number of games, and a lottery for false CZ/AT premonitions are held.

When the main control unit 41 wins the win rate increase transition lottery in the state before the number of normal games in the normal general reaches the specified number of games, or when one or more win rate increase transition flags described later are stocked at the end of the win rate increase, the end of the win rate increase false premonition, or the end of the CZ/AT false premonition, the main control unit 41 controls the next game to the win rate increase premonition, and sets the remaining number of games in the win rate increase premonition to 4 or 5 games at the win rate increase premonition transition. After that, when 4 or 5 games have passed since the transition to the win rate increase premonition, the main control unit 41 controls the next game to the win rate increase. In the win rate increase premonition, the same performance as the win rate increase false premonition is executed, and if the number of normal games has reached the specified number of games, the win rate increase transition lottery, the game number addition lottery, and the CZ/AT false premonition lottery are executed, and if the number of normal games has exceeded the specified number of games, the first win rate increase lottery is executed (see FIG. 10).

When the main control unit 41 wins the win rate increase transition lottery in the win rate increase premonition to transition to the win rate increase, it stocks one win rate increase transition flag indicating the right to transition to the win rate increase. Also, when the win rate increase transition lottery to transition to the win rate increase false premonition is won in the win rate increase premonition, it stocks one win rate increase false premonition transition flag indicating the right to transition to the win rate increase false premonition. Also, when the first win rate increase lottery is won in the win rate increase premonition, the winning added value is added to the winning probability of the second AT lottery described below. Also, when the CZ/AT false premonition lottery is won in the win rate increase premonition, it stocks one CZ/AT false premonition transition flag indicating the right to transition to the CZ/AT false premonition.

When the win rate increase transition occurs, the main control unit 41 sets the number of remaining games in the win rate increase to 10 games. After that, when 10 games have passed, control resumes in normal mode from the next game. In the win rate increase, a presentation corresponding to the win rate increase is executed, and regardless of whether the number of normal games has reached the specified number, a first win rate increase lottery is held, and if the number of normal games has reached the specified number, a game number addition lottery and a CZ/AT false omen lottery are held (see FIG. 10).

When the main control unit 41 wins the first win rate increase lottery in the win rate increase, it adds the winning added value to the winning probability of the second AT lottery described below. Also, when the main control unit 41 wins the CZ/AT false omen lottery in the win rate increase, it stocks one CZ/AT false omen transition flag, which indicates the right to transition to the CZ/AT false omen.

When the number of normal games in normal play reaches a specified number of games, if the win rate increase transition lottery is selected to transition to the win rate increase false sign, or when one or more win rate increase false sign transition flags are stored at the end of the win rate increase, the end of the win rate increase false sign, or the end of the CZ/AT false sign, the main control unit 41 controls the game to the win rate increase false sign from the next game and sets the remaining number of games in the win rate increase false sign to 4 or 5 games. After that, when the game transitions to the win rate increase false sign and 4 or 5 games have passed, the game is controlled to normal play from the next game. In the win rate increase false sign, the same effects as the win rate increase sign are executed, and if the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games, the win rate increase transition lottery, the game number addition lottery, and the CZ/AT false sign lottery are executed, and if the number of normal games exceeds the specified number of games, the first win rate increase lottery is executed (see FIG. 10).

When the win rate increase transition lottery for a win rate increase false omen is won in the win rate increase transition lottery for a win rate increase false omen, the main control unit 41 stocks one win rate increase transition flag. Also, when the win rate increase transition lottery for a win rate increase false omen is won in the win rate increase false omen, the main control unit 41 stocks one win rate increase false omen transition flag. Also, when the first win rate increase lottery is won in the win rate increase false omen, the won additional value is added to the winning probability of the second AT lottery described below. Also, when the CZ/AT false omen lottery is won in the win rate increase false omen, the main control unit 41 stocks one CZ/AT false omen transition flag.

When the number of normal games in normal play reaches a specified number, if the CZ/AT false sign lottery is won, or if one or more CZ/AT false sign transition flags are stocked at the end of the win rate increase or the end of the win rate increase false sign, the main control unit 41 controls the game to CZ/AT false sign from the next game, and sets the remaining number of games in the CZ/AT false sign to one of 3 to 5 games at the time of the CZ/AT false sign transition. After that, it transitions to the CZ/AT false sign, and when 3 to 5 games have passed after the transition, it controls the game to normal play from the next game. In the CZ/AT false sign, the same effects as in the CZ/AT sign state are executed, and if the number of normal games reaches a specified number, a win rate increase transition lottery and a game number addition lottery are executed, and if the number of normal games exceeds the specified number, a first win rate increase lottery is executed (see FIG. 10).

When the winning percentage increase transition lottery for a CZ/AT false omen is won to transition to a winning percentage increase, the main control unit 41 stocks one winning percentage increase transition flag. Also, when the winning percentage increase transition lottery for a CZ/AT false omen is won to transition to a winning percentage increase false omen, the main control unit 41 stocks one winning percentage increase false omen transition flag. Also, when the first winning percentage increase lottery is won in a winning percentage increase false omen, the winning added value is added to the probability of winning the second AT lottery described below.

When the main control unit 41 determines that the number of normal games has reached a specified number in normal play, it controls the next game to the CZ/AT premonition state. Also, when the main control unit 41 determines that the number of normal games has reached a specified number in win rate increase premonitions or win rate increase, it ends the win rate increase and controls the next game to the CZ/AT premonition state. Also, when the main control unit 41 determines that the number of normal games has reached a specified number in win rate increase false premonitions, it ends the win rate increase false premonition and controls the next game to the CZ/AT premonition state.

When transitioning to the CZ/AT precursor state, the main control unit 41 sets the number of games remaining in the CZ/AT precursor state to either 3 to 5 games. After that, when transitioning to the CZ/AT precursor state and 3 to 5 games have passed, control is made to the CZ state or AT state from the next game. In the CZ/AT precursor state, a presentation corresponding to the CZ/AT precursor state is executed, and if the first AT lottery does not determine a transition to the AT state, a second win rate increase lottery is held, and if the first AT lottery determines a transition to the AT state, a first addition lottery is held to add to the number of games remaining in the second AT state, which will be described later (see FIG. 10).

If the second win rate increase lottery is won during the CZ/AT precursor state, the winning value is added to the winning probability of the second AT lottery, which will be described later. Also, if the first additional lottery is won during the CZ/AT precursor state, the number of games won is added to the number of remaining games in the second AT state, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the CZ/AT precursor state, if the lottery flag 2 set in the first AT lottery has not yet been determined to transition to the AT state, and is one of 1 to 3, i.e., if either the weak chance replay A or B or the strong chance replay A or B is won, or if a specific minor win is won and one coin wins when the first AT lottery has not yet determined to transition to the AT state, the main control unit 41 executes a second win rate increase lottery to determine whether or not to increase the winning probability of the second AT lottery, which will be described later. On the other hand, if a specific minor win is won and one of the specific minor wins A, B, or C wins when the first AT lottery has not determined to transition to the AT state, the second win rate increase lottery is not executed.

In addition, in the CZ/AT precursor state, if the lottery flag 2 set in the state where the first AT lottery has determined that there will be a transition to the AT state is one of 1 to 3, i.e. if either the weak chance replay A or B or the strong chance replay A or B is won, if a specific minor win is won in the state where the first AT lottery has determined that there will be a transition to the AT state and one coin is won, the first add-on lottery is executed to determine whether or not to add to the number of remaining games in the AT state. On the other hand, if a specific minor win is won in the state where the first AT lottery has determined that there will be a transition to the AT state and one of the specific minor wins A, B, or C is won, the first add-on lottery is not executed.

When the CZ/AT precursor state is entered and 3-5 games have passed, if the first AT lottery does not determine that the player will enter the AT state, the player will enter the CZ state, and if the first AT lottery determines that the player will enter the AT state, the player will enter the AT state.

When transitioning to the CZ state, the main control unit 41 sets the number of remaining games in the CZ state to either 10 or 20 games. After that, when transitioning to the CZ state and 10 or 20 games have elapsed, control is made to switch to the normal section or the AT state from the next game. In the CZ state, a presentation corresponding to the CZ state is executed, and a second AT lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state (see Figure 10).

The winning probability of the second AT lottery varies depending on the value of the lottery flag 1, and the winning probability of other specific small roles, weak chance replays A and B, strong chance replays A and B are assigned respectively. The winning probability of each is set to be higher in the order of other specific small roles, weak chance replays A and B, and strong chance replays A and B. The winning probability of the second AT lottery is calculated by adding the added value won in the first win rate up lottery in the normal state and the second win rate up lottery in the CZ/AT precursor state to the probability according to the value of the lottery flag 1, and the second AT lottery is performed with the winning probability after the addition. In addition, in the second AT lottery, the second AT lottery is performed with the same winning probability whether one coin wins when a specific small role is won or whether any of the specific small roles A, B, or C wins.

When the number of remaining games in the CZ state becomes 0 and the second AT lottery is not won in the CZ state, the main control unit 41 ends the CZ state and the advantageous zone, and controls the next game to the normal zone. Then, after the advantageous zone transition role is won again to transition to the advantageous zone, the first AT lottery, mode lottery, and specified number of games lottery are again performed, and the state transitions to the normal state as described above.

When the number of remaining games in the CZ state becomes 0 and the second AT lottery has been won in that CZ state, the main control unit 41 ends the CZ state and controls the next game to the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 9, the main control unit 41 sets the number of remaining games in the second AT state when transitioning to the AT state. The initial value of the number of remaining games in the second AT state is 10 games, and the number of games won in the first additional lottery and the second and third additional lotteries described below are added to the number of remaining games in the second AT state.

When the main control unit 41 transitions to the AT state, it first controls the game to the first AT state. In the first AT state, a presentation corresponding to the first AT state is executed, and a second addition lottery is performed to add to the number of remaining games in the second AT state (see FIG. 10).

In the second additional lottery, depending on the value of the set lottery flag 1, the highest numerical value will be won in the following order: Other, Specific Minor Win, Weak Chance Replay A, B, Strong Chance Replay A, B. In addition, in the second additional lottery, when a specific minor win is won, whether one coin is won or whether any of the specific minor wins A, B, or C is won, a numerical value within the same range will be won.

As shown in FIG. 9, the main control unit 41 controls the first AT state, and then controls the second AT state after a specified number of games (30 games in this embodiment) have elapsed. In the second AT state, a presentation corresponding to the second AT state is executed, and a third add-on lottery is held to add to the number of remaining games in the second AT state (see FIG. 10). In the third add-on lottery, the highest value is selected according to the value of the set lottery flag 3, specifically in the order of weak chance replay A, B, strong chance replay A, and B.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the ED transition condition is met in the second AT state (in this embodiment, the net increase in the number of medals after the increase or decrease in the number of medals in the favorable zone changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend (favorable zone net increase) exceeds 2000 medals), the main control unit 41 controls the state to an ED state that continues until the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 medals. In the ED state, a presentation corresponding to the ED state is executed, and a setting suggestion lottery is performed by the sub-control unit 91 (see FIG. 10). In the setting suggestion lottery, the probability of the sub-control unit 91 executing a setting suggestion presentation suggesting a setting value increases in the order of weak chance replay A, B, strong chance replay A, B.

After the AT state begins, the main control unit 41 ends the AT state, ends the advantageous zone, and transitions to the normal zone when the conditions for ending the AT state (the number of remaining games in the second AT state becomes 0 in the second AT state, and the net increase in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400 in the ED state) are met.

In this embodiment, if any of the specific minor winning combinations is won in the internal lottery during the normal state and the CZ/AT precursor state, the player can receive a payout of eight medals by performing the stopping operations in the order of stopping operations that will win the specific minor winning combinations A, B, and C.

In contrast, in the normal state, if one of the specific minor winning symbols is selected in the internal lottery, the number of medals paid out will be reduced if the stopping operation is performed in the stopping operation order that will result in one medal winning without the specific minor winning symbols A, B, and C being selected, but in the normal state, the number of games won in the game number addition lottery is added to the number of normal games played, and the number of games required to transition to the CZ state or AT state can be reduced.

In other words, if one of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery in the normal state, by performing the stopping operation in the stopping operation sequence that results in the specific minor roles A, B, and C being won, it is possible to receive the payout of eight medals, and the medal payout rate in the normal state (number of medals paid out/number of medals used) can be increased, while by performing the stopping operation in the stopping operation sequence that results in one medal being won, resulting in one medal being won without the specific minor roles A, B, and C being won, the medal payout rate in the normal state will be lower, but the number of games until the number of normal games reaches 0, i.e., the number of games until the CZ state or AT state is entered, can be reduced.

In detail, in this embodiment, when one coin is won each time a specific minor role is won in the internal lottery, the number of normal games is added by the game number addition lottery by an average of about 0.3 games per game. Therefore, the number of games required to make the number of normal games won by the specified game number lottery 0 is 1 times the number of normal games remaining at that time when specific minor roles A, B, and C are won each time a specific minor role is won in the internal lottery, and about 0.8 times the number of normal games remaining at that time is required when one coin is won each time a specific minor role is won in the internal lottery. For example, when the number of normal games is 150, if specific minor roles A, B, and C are won each time a specific minor role is won in the internal lottery, the number of games required to make the number of normal games (150) 0 is 150 games on average. In contrast, if one coin is awarded each time one of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery, the average number of games required until the number of normal games (150) reaches 0 is 115. In this way, if one coin is awarded each time one of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery, it is possible to end the normal state and transition to the CZ state or AT state in fewer games than if specific minor roles A, B, or C were awarded each time one of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery, which is advantageous in that it increases the efficiency of playing the game.

On the other hand, if specific minor roles A, B, and C are won each time one of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery, the medals required to reach 0 for the number of regular games (150) would be approximately 210 medals in addition to the medals paid out for each minor role won and the grant of replays. In contrast, if one medal is won each time one of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery, the medals required to reach 0 for the number of regular games (150) would be approximately 210 medals in addition to the medals paid out for each minor role won and the grant of replays. In this way, the number of medals required to reach 0 in normal play, in addition to the medals paid out for each winning minor role and the granting of replays, is approximately the same in the case where specific minor roles A, B, and C are won each time one of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery in the normal state, and in the case where one coin is won each time one of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery. Therefore, as described above, when one of the specific minor roles is won in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to select the operation mode that wins one coin, as this increases the efficiency of the game. However, when one of the specific minor roles is won in the normal state, whether the player selects the operation mode that wins specific minor roles A, B, and C or the operation mode that wins one coin, there is almost no difference in the long-term medal payout rate.

In addition, in the CZ/AT precursor state, if one of the specific minor winning symbols is selected in the internal lottery, stopping the reels in the order that will result in one winning symbol being selected without the specific minor winning symbols A, B, and C being selected. This will reduce the number of medals paid out, and will not shorten the number of games played until the reels transition to the CZ state, but will result in the first win rate increase lottery being held, increasing the probability of transitioning to the AT state.

In this embodiment, in the normal section, if any of the specific small prizes are won in the internal lottery, regardless of whether specific small prizes A, B, or C are won or whether one coin is won, the player will move to the advantageous section. Therefore, in the normal section, if any of the specific small prizes are won in the internal lottery, it is more advantageous to win specific small prizes A, B, or C.

In this embodiment, in the CZ state and the AT state, if any of the specific minor roles is won in the internal lottery, a common second AT lottery is executed in the CZ state, and a common second additional lottery is executed in the AT state, so that in the CZ state and the AT state, if any of the specific minor roles is won, it is advantageous to win the specific minor roles A, B, or C.

In addition, in the CZ/AT precursor state, which transitions to the CZ state within at least 3 to 5 games, if one of the specific small roles is won and one coin is awarded, if the weak chance replay A, B, or strong chance replay A, B is won, if the first AT lottery is not won, the second win rate increase lottery is held, while if the first AT lottery is won, the first additional lottery is held. In a situation where the transition to the AT state has already been decided in the CZ/AT precursor state, if the transition to the AT state has not been decided, even if the lottery conditions that trigger the second AT lottery are established, the establishment of the lottery conditions will not be wasted. In particular, even if the specific small roles A, B, and C are won, the specific small roles A, B, and C are not awarded, and the payout of 8 medals is not received, the choice not to award the specific small roles A, B, and C will not be wasted.

In this embodiment, in the normal state and the CZ/AT precursor state, the stop operation is recommended in the stop operation sequence that will win one coin if a specific small win is won, and when a specific small win is won in the normal state and the CZ/AT precursor state, a navigation notification is made to notify the stop operation sequence that will win one coin, and the stop operation is encouraged in the stop operation sequence that will win one coin. Also, in the CZ state and the AT state, the stop operation is recommended in the stop operation sequence that will win one of the specific small wins A, B, and C if a specific small win is won, and when a specific small win is won in the CZ state and the AT state, a navigation notification is made to notify the stop operation sequence that will win one of the specific small wins A, B, and C, and the stop operation is encouraged in the stop operation sequence that will win one of the specific small wins A, B, and C. In addition, in the normal section, even if a specific small win is won, no navigation notification is made, and the stop operation is encouraged in any stop operation sequence.

In this embodiment, in the case of the win rate increase omen and the win rate increase false omen in the normal state, when the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games, if either of the weak chance replays A, B, or strong chance replays A, B is selected in the internal lottery, the win rate increase transition lottery is held. On the other hand, in the case of the win rate increase omen and the win rate increase false omen in the normal state, when the number of normal games exceeds the specified number of games, if either of the weak chance replays A, B, or strong chance replays A, B is selected in the internal lottery, the win rate increase transition lottery is not held. Then, a first win rate increase lottery is held to add the winning probability of the second AT lottery in the CZ state. Therefore, even if the lottery conditions that trigger the win rate increase transition lottery are met when the number of regular games exceeds the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition or a false win rate increase premonition, the fulfillment of the lottery conditions will not be wasted, and the player will not be disadvantaged if the period until the transition to the CZ state is extended due to a win rate increase premonition or a false win rate increase premonition.

[About the advantageous zone state and the performance state]
Next, the correspondence between the advantageous zone state and the presentation state will be explained based on Figures 11 to 15.

The sub-control unit 91 can determine the state of the next game based on commands sent from the main control unit 41; if it is in a normal state, it can determine the normal game count and the specified game count; and further determine whether it is normal, a win rate increase premonition, a win rate increase, a false win rate increase premonition, a CZ/AT false premonition, the remaining number of games of a win rate increase premonition, the remaining number of games of a win rate increase, the remaining number of games of a false win rate increase premonition, and the remaining number of games of a CZ/AT false premonition; and if it is in a CZ/AT premonition state, it can determine the remaining number of games in the CZ/AT premonition state.

As shown in Figures 11 to 15, the sub-control unit 91 executes a normal presentation when the advantageous zone state is normal general. In the normal presentation, the number of normal games that started to be updated when the normal zone transitioned to the advantageous zone and then to normal general is displayed, allowing the player to recognize the current number of normal games.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games while the advantageous zone state is normal on the main control unit 41 side, and a transition to the CZ/AT premonition state occurs, the sub-control unit 91 executes a CZ/AT premonition effect for a period controlled to the CZ/AT premonition state. The CZ/AT premonition effect suggests that there is a possibility of transitioning to the CZ state or the AT state, and notifies the result of the effect that the game will ultimately transition to the CZ state, transition to the AT state, or not transition to either the CZ state or the AT state. After the end of the CZ/AT premonition state, the game is always controlled to the CZ state or the AT state, so the CZ/AT premonition effect in the CZ/AT premonition state notifies the result of the effect that the game will ultimately transition to the CZ state or transition to the AT state. Thereafter, when the CZ/AT precursor state ends on the main control unit 41 side and control is exercised in the CZ state, the sub-control unit 91 executes a CZ performance in a performance mode specific to the CZ state for the period controlled to the CZ state, and when the CZ/AT precursor state ends on the main control unit 41 side and control is exercised in the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 executes an AT performance in a performance mode specific to the AT state for the period controlled to the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the main control unit 41 side wins the CZ/AT false premonition lottery while the advantageous zone state is normal general and transitions to a CZ/AT false premonition, the sub-control unit 91 executes a CZ/AT premonition performance for the period controlled by the CZ/AT false premonition. After the CZ/AT false premonition ends, control is not established to either the CZ state or the AT state, so the CZ/AT premonition performance in the CZ/AT false premonition ultimately notifies the performance result that the state will not transition to either the CZ state or the AT state. After that, the sub-control unit 91 executes a normal performance when the main control unit 41 side ends the CZ/AT false premonition and control is established to normal general.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is normal and the win rate increase transition lottery is won to transition to a win rate increase, and a transition to a win rate increase premonition occurs, the sub-control unit 91 executes a win rate increase premonition effect with a different presentation style from the CZ/AT premonition effects during the period controlled by the win rate increase premonition. The win rate increase premonition effect suggests that there is a possibility of a transition to a win rate increase, and ultimately notifies the player of the presentation result that there will be a transition to a win rate increase or that there will not be a transition to a win rate increase. After the win rate increase premonition ends, control is always given to a win rate increase, so the win rate increase premonition effect in the win rate increase premonition ultimately notifies the player of the presentation result that there will be a transition to a win rate increase. Thereafter, when the main control unit 41 ends the winning percentage increase precursor and is controlled to win percentage increase, the sub-control unit 91 executes a winning percentage increase presentation in a presentation mode specific to winning percentage increase for the period controlled to win percentage increase, and when the main control unit 41 ends the winning percentage increase and is controlled normally, the sub-control unit 91 executes a normal presentation.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is normal general and the win rate increase transition lottery is drawn to transition to a win rate increase false premonition, and a transition to a win rate increase false premonition occurs, the sub-control unit 91 executes a win rate increase premonition presentation for the period controlled by the win rate increase false premonition. After the win rate increase false premonition ends, control to win rate increase is no longer performed, so the win rate increase premonition presentation during the win rate increase false premonition ultimately notifies the presentation result that there will be no transition to a win rate increase. After that, the sub-control unit 91 executes a normal presentation when the win rate increase false premonition ends on the main control unit 41 side and control is normal general.

As shown in Figures 13(a) and (b), when the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games while the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is a win rate increase premonition, after the win rate increase premonition ends, it is controlled to win rate increase, after the win rate increase ends, it is controlled to the CZ/AT premonition state, and after the CZ/AT premonition state ends, it is controlled to the CZ state or the AT state. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 executes the win rate increase premonition effect during the period until the win rate increase premonition ends, executes the win rate increase effect during the period controlled to the win rate increase, executes the CZ/AT premonition effect during the period controlled to the CZ/AT premonition state, and then executes the CZ effect when controlled to the CZ state, and executes the AT effect when controlled to the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the number of normal games reaches the ceiling (250 in this embodiment) of the specified number of games, particularly when the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is a win rate increase precursor, in other words, when the specified number of games is exceeded and a transition to the CZ state or the AT state is confirmed, the sub-control unit 91 executes the win rate increase precursor effect, win rate increase effect, and CZ/AT precursor effect from the game following the game in which the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games until the CZ/AT precursor state ends, while simultaneously displaying a CZ or AT preparation to notify that the number of normal games has reached the specified number of games and is preparing to transition to the CZ state or the AT state.

As shown in Figure 13 (c), when the main control unit 41 wins the CZ/AT false premonition lottery while the advantageous zone state is a win rate up premonition, after the win rate up premonition ends, it is controlled to win rate up, and after the win rate up ends, it is controlled to CZ/AT false premonition. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 executes the win rate up premonition effect during the period until the win rate up premonition ends, executes the win rate up effect during the period controlled to win rate up, and executes the CZ/AT premonition effect during the period controlled to the CZ/AT false premonition state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13(a) , when the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games other than the ceiling (250 in this embodiment) among the specified number of games while the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is a win rate up sign, in other words, when the transition to the CZ state or AT state is not confirmed even after the specified number of games is exceeded, the CZ or AT preparation display is not performed in parallel with the win rate up sign performance, win rate up performance, and CZ/AT sign performance, so that after the win rate up sign ends, it is controlled to win rate up, and after the win rate up ends it is controlled to CZ/AT false sign, and even if the CZ/AT sign performance is executed during that time, it is possible to expect that it will be controlled to the CZ state or AT state.

As shown in Figures 14(a) and (b), when the number of normal games reaches a specified number while the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is in the win rate up state, after the win rate up state ends, the state is controlled to the CZ/AT premonition state, and after the CZ/AT premonition state ends, the state is controlled to the CZ state or the AT state. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 executes the win rate up effect during the period until the win rate up state ends, executes the CZ/AT premonition effect during the period controlled to the CZ/AT premonition state, and then executes the CZ effect when controlled to the CZ state, and executes the AT effect when controlled to the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), when the number of normal games reaches the ceiling number (250 in this embodiment) of the specified number of games, particularly when the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is a win rate up state, that is, when the specified number of games is exceeded and a transition to the CZ state or the AT state is confirmed, the sub-control unit 91 executes the win rate up effect and the CZ/AT premonition effect while simultaneously displaying the CZ or AT preparation status during the period from the game following the game in which the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games to the end of the CZ/AT premonition state.

As shown in FIG. 14(c), when the main control unit 41 side wins the CZ/AT false premonition lottery while the advantageous zone state is in the win rate up state, the game is controlled to the CZ/AT false premonition state after the win rate up state ends. In this case, the sub-control unit 91 executes the win rate up effect during the period until the win rate up state ends, and executes the CZ/AT premonition effect during the period controlled to the CZ/AT false premonition state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games other than the ceiling (250 in this embodiment) among the specified number of games while the advantageous zone state is in the win rate up state on the main control unit 41 side, that is, when the transition to the CZ state or the AT state is not confirmed even after the specified number of games is exceeded, the CZ or AT preparation display is not performed in parallel with the win rate up effect and the CZ/AT premonition effect, so that it is possible to expect that the game will be controlled to the CZ state or the AT state even if the CZ/AT premonition effect is executed during that time, when the game is controlled to the CZ/AT false premonition state after the win rate up state ends.

As shown in Figures 15(a) and (b), when the number of normal games reaches a prescribed number while the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is a win rate increase false premonition, after the win rate increase false premonition ends, it is controlled to the CZ/AT premonition state, and after the CZ/AT premonition state ends, it is controlled to the CZ state or the AT state. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 executes the win rate increase premonition effect during the period until the win rate increase false premonition ends, executes the CZ/AT premonition effect during the period controlled to the CZ/AT premonition state, and then executes the CZ effect when controlled to the CZ state, and executes the AT effect when controlled to the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games that is the ceiling (250 in this embodiment) among the specified number of games, particularly when the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is a win rate increase false premonition, in other words, when the specified number of games is exceeded and a transition to a CZ state or an AT state is confirmed, the sub-control unit 91 will execute the win rate increase premonition effect and the CZ/AT premonition effect while simultaneously displaying the CZ or AT preparation status during the period from the game following the game in which the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games until the CZ/AT premonition state ends.

15(c), when the main control unit 41 wins the CZ/AT false premonition lottery while the advantageous zone state is a win rate increase false premonition, the sub-control unit 91 executes the win rate increase false premonition effect during the period until the win rate increase false premonition ends, and executes the CZ/AT premonition effect during the period controlled to the CZ/AT false premonition state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games other than the ceiling (250 in this embodiment) among the specified number of games while the advantageous zone state on the main control unit 41 side is the win rate increase false premonition, that is, when the transition to the CZ state or the AT state is not confirmed even after the specified number of games is exceeded, the CZ or AT preparation display is not performed in parallel with the win rate increase premonition effect and the CZ/AT premonition effect, so that after the win rate increase false premonition ends, it is controlled to the CZ/AT false premonition, and even if the CZ/AT premonition effect is executed during that time, it is possible to expect that it will be controlled to the CZ state or the AT state.

In this embodiment, after it is determined in the win rate increase transition lottery that the win rate will be increased, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games during the win rate increase premonition before the win rate increase is announced, the game will transition to the CZ state or AT state at least after the win rate increase premonition ends. In this case, a CZ or AT preparation display is displayed, suggesting that the number of normal games has reached the specified number of games and that preparations are underway to transition to the CZ state or AT state, so that even if the number of normal games does not reach the specified number of games and transition to the CZ state or AT state is not made, it is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful.

In this embodiment, by winning the win rate increase transition lottery in the normal state, the win rate is controlled to be increased, which makes it easier to increase the probability of winning the AT lottery in the subsequent CZ state, and by being controlled to increase the win rate, it can be expected that the win rate of the AT lottery in the CZ state will be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of normal games reaches a specified number while controlled to increase the winning percentage, the game is transitioned to the CZ state at least after the winning percentage increase ends, and since the winning probability of the AT lottery in the CZ state is increased during the winning percentage increase and then the game is transitioned to the CZ state, it can be expected that the game will be controlled to the AT state while in the CZ state.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate increase, the state will transition to the CZ state or the AT state at least after the win rate increase ends. However, even in this case, a CZ or AT preparation display is displayed, suggesting that the number of normal games has reached the specified number and that preparations are underway to transition to the CZ state or the AT state. This prevents players from becoming distrustful even if the number of normal games reaches the specified number and the state does not transition to the CZ state or the AT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the win rate increase transition lottery does not determine that the game will be controlled to win rate increase, it is possible to control to a win rate increase false premonition, and if the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games during the win rate increase false premonition, the game will transition to the CZ state or AT state after the win rate increase false premonition ends. Even in this case, a CZ or AT preparation display is displayed, suggesting that the number of normal games has reached the specified number of games and that preparations are underway to transition to the CZ state or AT state, so that even if the number of normal games has reached the specified number of games and the game does not transition to the CZ state or AT state, it is possible to prevent players from feeling distrustful.

In this embodiment, a win rate increase transition lottery is performed in the normal state, and after it is determined that the win rate will be increased, the win rate is increased by the time the win rate is increased. However, any configuration is acceptable as long as a bonus lottery is performed in the normal state to determine whether or not to grant a bonus, and after it is determined that the bonus will be granted, the bonus is granted by a premonition period spanning multiple games by the time the bonus is granted. Even in such a configuration, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the premonition period, the game transitions to the CZ state or the AT state at least after the premonition period ends. In this case, a CZ or AT preparation display is performed to indicate that the number of normal games has reached the specified number and preparations are being made to transition to the CZ state or the AT state, which can prevent players from feeling distrustful even if the number of normal games does not transition to the CZ state or the AT state due to the specified number of games being reached.

In addition, the benefit is not limited to an increase in the winning rate, i.e., controlling the probability of winning the AT lottery in the subsequent CZ state to a state where it is easy to increase the probability, but may also be to increase the probability of winning the AT lottery in the subsequent CZ state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of normal games is increased as games are played, and the CZ state or AT state is controlled when the number of normal games reaches a preset number of games. However, an initial number of normal games may be set, and the number of normal games is subtracted as games are played, and the CZ state or AT state is controlled when the number of normal games reaches a preset number of games (for example, 0). Even in this configuration, if the number of normal games reaches a preset number of games during the win rate increase premonition until the win rate increase premonition is announced after the win rate increase transition lottery has determined that the game will be controlled to win rate increase, the game will transition to the CZ state or AT state at least after the win rate increase premonition has ended. In this case, a CZ or AT preparation display is displayed to indicate that the number of normal games has reached the preset number of games and that preparations are being made to transition to the CZ state or AT state, which can prevent players from feeling distrustful even when the number of normal games does not transition to the CZ state or AT state due to the preset number of games being reached.

In this embodiment, after the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate increase premonition, if a weak chance replay or strong chance replay, which triggers a win rate increase transition lottery, is won before the win rate increase premonition has passed and the transition to the CZ state occurs, a first win rate increase lottery is held in the subsequent CZ state, which increases the probability of winning the second AT lottery, so that the player is not disadvantaged even if the period until the transition to the CZ state is extended due to the win rate increase premonition.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate increase false premonition, if a weak chance replay or strong chance replay that triggers the win rate increase transition lottery is won before the win rate increase false premonition has passed and the transition to the CZ state occurs, a first win rate increase lottery is held in the subsequent CZ state in which the winning probability of the second AT lottery is increased, so that the player is not disadvantaged even if the period until the transition to the CZ state is extended due to the win rate increase false premonition.

In this embodiment, the specified number of games can be set from a number of different numbers of games, and only when a ceiling number of games (250 in this embodiment) that is the maximum specified number of games is set, if the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, or false win rate increase premonition, the CZ or AT preparation display is displayed, and only when the number of normal games exceeds the maximum value that can be set as the specified number of games but the transition to the CZ state or AT state does not occur can be recognized as to the cause.

On the other hand, when the specified number of games is set to a number other than the maximum ceiling number of games (250 in this embodiment), if the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate up premonition, win rate up, or false win rate up premonition, the CZ or AT preparation display is not performed. Therefore, even if the CZ or AT preparation display is not performed during a win rate up premonition, win rate up, or false win rate up premonition, it is possible that the number of normal games has reached the specified number of games, so it can be expected that the game will be controlled to the CZ state or AT state when the CZ/AT premonition performance is executed after the win rate up or false win rate up premonition ends.

In this embodiment, the specified number of games can be set from a number of different numbers of games, and only when the maximum ceiling number of games (250 in this embodiment) is set as the specified number of games, the CZ or AT preparation display is displayed when the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, or a false win rate increase premonition. However, regardless of the number of games set as the specified number of games, the CZ or AT preparation display may be displayed when the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, or a false win rate increase premonition. With this configuration, regardless of the number of games set as the specified number of games, the CZ or AT preparation display is displayed when the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, or a false win rate increase premonition, so the processing does not become complicated.

In this embodiment, when the number of normal games reaches a specified number in the normal state, the state may be controlled to either the CZ state or the AT state, and when the number of normal games reaches the specified number, the state may be controlled to the AT/CZ premonition state over a plurality of games, and a CZ/AT premonition effect may be performed to indicate whether the state will be controlled to the CZ state or the AT state during that period. In addition, when the number of normal games reaches a specified number in the normal state, the state is controlled to the AT/CZ premonition state from the next game, and a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed, whereas when the number of normal games reaches a specified number during a win rate up premonition, win rate up, or win rate up false premonition, the state is controlled to the AT/CZ premonition state after the win rate up or win rate up false premonition ends, and a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed. Even if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during a win rate up premonition, win rate up, or win rate up false premonition, attention can be drawn to whether the state will transition to the CZ state or the AT state due to the reaching of the specified number of games.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate increase premonition, after the win rate increase controlled thereafter ends, the state is controlled to be an AT/CZ premonition, and the CZ/AT premonition performance is performed, so that after the win rate increase premonition has passed and the win rate increase has been controlled, attention can be drawn to whether the state will transition to a CZ state or an AT state due to the specified number of games being reached.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games during the win rate increase false premonition, the game is controlled to the AT/CZ premonition state after the win rate increase false premonition ends, and the CZ/AT premonition performance is performed. Even if the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during the win rate increase false premonition, attention can be drawn to whether the game will transition to the CZ state or the AT state due to reaching the specified number of games.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate up premonition, and then after the controlled win rate up ends, the state is controlled to AT/CZ premonition and a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed, even if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate up false premonition, and after the win rate up false premonition ends, the state is controlled to AT/CZ premonition and a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed, a common type of AT/CZ premonition effect is performed, and whether a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed after the win rate up premonition has passed and the state is controlled to win rate up, or whether a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed after the win rate up false premonition has passed, a common type of CZ/AT premonition effect is performed, so the content of the CZ/AT premonition effect is easy to understand.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the winning percentage increase premonition effect performed during a winning percentage increase premonition or a false winning percentage increase premonition is different from the presentation mode of the CZ/AT premonition effect performed during a CZ/AT premonition state or a false CZ/AT premonition, so it is possible to distinguish whether a winning percentage increase premonition effect is being performed or a CZ/AT premonition effect is being performed.

[About the winning rate increase premonitions]
Next, the winning rate increase premonition effects in the normal state will be described with reference to FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 16, the main control unit 41, in the normal state, performs a win rate up transition lottery and determines whether or not to transition to a win rate up, and if not, whether or not to transition to a win rate up false omen. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 executes a win rate up transition lottery suggestion effect. In the win rate up transition lottery suggestion effect, a reel flash is executed to flash the LEDs arranged behind the reels at the third stop, suggesting that a win rate up transition lottery has been executed. In addition, since the win rate up transition lottery is executed when a weak chance replay or strong chance replay is won, the derivation of a pattern combination of a weak chance replay or strong chance replay also suggests that a win rate up transition lottery has been executed.

The sub-control unit 91 also executes a winning percentage increase premonition effect during the period when the main control unit 41 controls the winning percentage increase premonition or the false winning percentage increase premonition. As shown in FIG. 16, the winning percentage increase premonition effect is composed of a scenario effect and a specific effect. The scenario effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to a winning percentage increase in each game other than the final game of the winning percentage increase premonition or the false winning percentage increase premonition, and the specific effect is an effect that is performed in a different presentation style from the scenario effect in the final game of the winning percentage increase premonition or the false winning percentage increase premonition, and that notifies the result of whether or not the winning percentage will be increased.

The sub-control unit 91 may display, as the winning percentage increase precursor effect, a daytime background image (Figure 24(a)) in which the background image is the same as the normal effect, or a nighttime background image (Figure 24(b)) that is different from the normal effect. When the winning percentage increase is won, the nighttime background image winning percentage increase precursor effect is executed more frequently than when the winning percentage increase is not won, and the execution of the nighttime background image winning percentage increase precursor effect suggests that there is a higher possibility of winning the winning percentage increase than when the winning percentage increase precursor effect is executed with the daytime background image.

The main control unit 41 can also control the winning percentage increase premonition and false winning percentage increase premonition in which the winning percentage increase premonition effect is executed to a period of four or five games. If the winning percentage increase is won, the control is more likely to be performed over a period of five games than if the winning percentage increase is not won, and the winning percentage increase premonition effect continues for five games, suggesting that the winning percentage increase is more likely to be won than if the winning percentage increase premonition effect ends after four games.

The sub-control unit 91 is set with a scenario that defines a combination of presentation patterns for presentations to be executed in each game during the period in which the scenario presentation is executed, and at the start of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the sub-control unit 91 performs a scenario lottery to select one of the scenarios with a probability according to whether or not the win rate increase has been won, and controls the presentation according to the presentation pattern for each game defined in the scenario that has been won in the scenario lottery.

The presentation patterns performed in each scenario presentation game include a pattern in which presentation A is executed in response to a start operation, and a pattern in which presentation B is executed, as shown in Figures 17 to 22.

As shown in Figures 24(c) and (d), performance A is a performance in which a character is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and a "?" mark is displayed to the left of the character. Performance A includes performances A1 and A2, which have different performance aspects. As shown in Figures 24(c) and (d), performances A1 and A2 differ in the number of "?" marks displayed to the left of the character.

As shown in Figures 24(e) and (f), effect B is an effect in which a character is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and "!!" is displayed to the right of the character. Effect B includes effect B1 and effect B2, which have different presentation forms. As shown in Figures 24(e) and (f), effect B1 and effect B2 differ in the number of "!!"s displayed to the right of the character.

Both performance A and performance B are performances in which the start operation switches the displayed image, including the background image of the performance that had been executed up until that point. During a scenario performance, before the start operation, the LCD display 51 displays the daytime background image shown in FIG. 24(a) and the nighttime background image shown in FIG. 24(b), and when performance A or performance B begins by the start operation, the displayed image, including the background image, switches as shown in FIG. 24(c) to (f).

As shown in Figures 17 to 22, the presentation patterns performed in each game in the scenario presentation include a pattern in which presentation A or presentation B is executed in response to a start operation, and then the presentation result is displayed in response to a first stop operation (the first operation to stop the reels after the game starts), a pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a third stop operation (the third operation to stop the reels after the game starts), and a pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a presentation operation (operation of presentation switch 56) after the third stop operation.

In a pattern in which the performance result is displayed in response to a performance operation (operation of the performance switch 56) after the third stop operation, performance A or B is executed in response to a start operation, and then an operation instruction image prompting the operation of the performance switch 56 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in response to the third stop operation, as shown in FIG. 26(b), and the performance result is displayed when the performance switch 56 is operated in this state.

In addition, the presentation patterns performed in each game in the scenario presentation include a pattern in which a chance logo A is displayed as a presentation result after presentation A or presentation B is executed in response to a start operation, a pattern in which a chance logo B is displayed, and a pattern in which a small win announcement is displayed, as shown in Figures 17 to 22.

As shown in Figures 25(a) and (b), Chance Logo A is an effect in which the Chance Logo A, which displays "Chance" on the liquid crystal display 51, is displayed as the effect result. Chance Logo A includes Chance Logo A (small) and Chance Logo A (large), which have different effect modes. As shown in Figures 25(a) and (b), Chance Logo A (small) and Chance Logo A (large) differ in the size of the displayed Chance Logo A.

As shown in Figures 25(c) and (d), Chance Logo B is a logo that reads "Chance" on the LCD 51, and is an effect that displays Chance Logo B, which is a different color from Chance Logo A, as the effect result. Chance Logo B includes Chance Logo B (small) and Chance Logo B (large), which have different effect modes. As shown in Figures 25(c) and (d), Chance Logo B (small) and Chance Logo B (large) are displayed with different sizes of logos.

As shown in Figures 25(e) and (f), the small prize announcement is an effect in which a pattern corresponding to the result of an internal lottery is displayed as an effect result on the liquid crystal display 51. The small prize announcement includes the small prize announcement (small) and the small prize announcement (large), which have different presentation modes. As shown in Figures 25(e) and (f), the small prize announcement (small) and the small prize announcement (large) have different sizes of the patterns displayed.

The sub-control unit 91 performs a specific effect lottery to select a specific effect pattern with a probability according to whether or not the win rate increase has been won and the type of win rate increase precursor effect, and executes the specific effect according to the effect pattern that has been won in the specific effect lottery.

Regardless of the presentation pattern of the specific presentation, as shown in FIG. 23, when the start operation is initiated, presentation C is executed, which displays an image suggesting that the player will be notified of whether or not they have won the win rate increase transition lottery, as shown in FIG. 26(a).

Furthermore, the presentation patterns of the specific presentation include a pattern in which, after presentation C is executed in response to a start operation as shown in FIG. 23, a winning percentage increase notification is displayed as a presentation result indicating that the winning percentage increase has been won as shown in FIG. 26(c), and a pattern in which a winning percentage increase non-win is displayed as a presentation result indicating that the winning percentage increase has not been won as shown in FIG. 26(d).

As shown in FIG. 23, the presentation patterns of the specific presentation include a pattern in which presentation C is executed in response to a start operation, and then a pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a first stop operation, a pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a third stop operation, and a pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a presentation operation after the third stop operation. Note that the pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a first stop operation is only the pattern in which a win rate increase notification is displayed, indicating that a win rate increase has been won as a presentation result.

In a pattern in which the performance result is displayed in response to a performance operation (operation of the performance switch 56) after the third stop operation, performance C is executed in response to a start operation, and then an operation instruction image prompting the operation of the performance switch 56 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in response to the third stop operation, as shown in FIG. 26(b), and the performance result is displayed when the performance switch 56 is operated in this state.

In this embodiment, the selection rate for each type of scenario varies depending on whether or not you have won the win rate increase in the scenario lottery.

As shown in FIG. 27, in a scenario that includes a presentation pattern in which presentation A is executed three or more times in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate A when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate a when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, the execution of presentation A three or more times in the win rate increase precursor presentation suggests that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in a scenario that includes a presentation pattern in which presentation B is executed three or more times in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate B when the win rate increase is won is set to be higher than the selection rate b when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, the execution of presentation B three or more times in the win rate increase precursor presentation suggests that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in a scenario that includes a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation three or more times in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate C when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate c when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, when the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation three or more times in the win rate increase precursor presentation, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in a scenario that includes a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed three or more times in response to the third stop operation or presentation operation in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate D when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate d when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, when the presentation result is displayed three or more times in response to the third stop operation or subsequent operations in the win rate increase precursor presentation, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in a scenario that includes a presentation pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed three or more times as a presentation result in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate E when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate e when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, when the chance logo A is displayed three or more times as a presentation result in the win rate increase precursor presentation, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in a scenario that includes a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed three or more times as a presentation result in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate F when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate f when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, when the chance logo B is displayed three or more times as a presentation result in the win rate increase precursor presentation, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in a scenario that includes a presentation pattern in which presentation A2 or B2 is executed two or more times in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate G when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate g when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, the execution of presentation A2 or B2 two or more times in the win rate increase precursor presentation suggests that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in a scenario that includes two or more presentation patterns in which the presentation result is displayed in response to a presentation operation in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate H when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate h when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, when the presentation result is displayed in response to a presentation operation two or more times in the win rate increase precursor presentation, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in a scenario that includes a presentation pattern in which Chance Logo A (large), Chance Logo B (large), or Small Win Notification (large) is displayed two or more times as a presentation result in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, the selection rate I when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate i when the win rate increase is not won. For this reason, when Chance Logo A (large), Chance Logo B (large), or Small Win Notification (large) is displayed two or more times as a presentation result in the win rate increase precursor presentation, it suggests that there is a high possibility that the win rate increase has been won.

The sub-control unit 91 may also execute effects that are common to the effect patterns executed in each game that constitutes the scenario effect, even when the win rate increase premonition effect is not in progress. However, unlike during the win rate increase premonition effect, the effect pattern across multiple games is not determined by the scenario, but rather the effect pattern is determined by lottery for each game. In this way, effect A is not executed consecutively, effect B is not executed consecutively, the effect result is not displayed consecutively triggered by the first stop operation, the effect result is not displayed consecutively triggered by the third stop operation or later, the chance logo A is not displayed consecutively as the effect result, and the chance logo B is not displayed consecutively as the effect result, and compared to when the effect pattern is determined by the scenario during the win rate increase premonition effect, the effect A is not executed consecutively, effect B is not executed consecutively, the effect result is not displayed consecutively triggered by the first stop operation, the effect result is not displayed consecutively triggered by the third stop operation or later, the chance logo A is not displayed consecutively as the effect result, and the chance logo B is not displayed consecutively as the effect result.

In this embodiment, in the specific effect lottery, the selection rate of the pattern that displays the win rate increase notification, which indicates that the win rate increase has been won, varies depending on the type of win rate increase precursor effect.

As shown in FIG. 28, the selection rate (J1) of the pattern in which the win rate increase notice is displayed in response to the first stop operation when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a daytime background image that is the same as the normal effect background image is set to be higher than the selection rate (K1) of the pattern in which the win rate increase notice is displayed in response to the first stop operation when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a nighttime background image that is different from the normal effect background image. Therefore, when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a daytime background image, the probability that the win rate increase notice is displayed in response to the first stop operation is higher than when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a nighttime background image.

The selection rate (J3) of the pattern in which a winning percentage increase notice is displayed as a result of a presentation operation when a winning percentage increase premonition effect is executed with a daytime background image is set to be higher than the selection rate (K3) of the pattern in which a winning percentage increase notice is displayed as a result of a presentation operation when a winning percentage increase premonition effect is executed with a nighttime background image. Therefore, when a winning percentage increase premonition effect is executed with a daytime background image, the probability that a winning percentage increase notice is displayed as a result of a presentation operation is higher than when a winning percentage increase premonition effect is executed with a nighttime background image.

In addition, the selection rate (L1) of the pattern in which the win percentage increase notification is displayed in response to the first stop operation when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance is set to be higher than the selection rate (M1) of the pattern in which the win percentage increase notification is displayed in response to the first stop operation when the win percentage increase notification is displayed five games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance. Therefore, when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the probability that the win percentage increase notification is displayed in response to the first stop operation is higher than when the win percentage increase notification is displayed five games, which is more than four games, after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance.

In addition, the selection rate (L3) of the pattern in which the winning percentage increase notification is displayed as a trigger of a presentation operation when the winning percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the winning percentage increase premonition effect is set to be higher than the selection rate (M3) of the pattern in which the winning percentage increase notification is displayed as a trigger of a presentation operation when the winning percentage increase notification is displayed five games after the start of the winning percentage increase premonition effect. Therefore, when the winning percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the winning percentage increase premonition effect, the probability that the winning percentage increase notification is displayed as a trigger of a presentation operation is higher than when the winning percentage increase notification is displayed five games, which is more than four games, after the start of the winning percentage increase premonition effect.

In this embodiment, the following effects are included: a performance pattern in which the first stop operation is triggered after performance A is executed, a performance pattern in which the first stop operation is triggered after performance B is executed, a performance pattern in which the first stop operation is triggered after performance A is executed, a performance pattern in which the third stop operation or later is triggered after performance A is executed, and a performance pattern in which the third stop operation or later is triggered after performance B is executed. For a scenario in which the performance pattern in which performance A is executed is included three or more times in the multiple games constituting the scenario performance of the win rate increase premonition performance, the selection rate A when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate a when the win rate increase is not won. When the win rate increase is won, the performance is executed with a performance pattern in which performance A is executed with a high probability in the multiple games constituting the scenario performance. Therefore, after the win rate increase is won, in the multiple games constituting the scenario performance of the win rate increase premonition performance, the frequent occurrence of the performance in which the performance result is displayed after performance A is executed allows players to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of a scenario that includes a presentation pattern that executes presentation A three or more times is set higher when the win rate increase is won than when the win rate increase is not won, so that when the win rate increase is won, a presentation pattern that executes presentation A is executed with a high probability. However, in a configuration that does not have a scenario and determines the presentation pattern for each game, the probability that a presentation pattern that executes presentation A will be determined in the games up until the fact that the win rate increase has been won when the win rate increase is won may be increased compared to the games up until the fact that the win rate increase has not been won when the win rate increase is not won. Even in such a configuration, in the win rate increase precursor presentation, the frequent presentation in which the presentation result is displayed after presentation A is executed can be expected to have been won.

In addition, in this embodiment, for a scenario in which a presentation pattern for executing presentation B is included three or more times in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the selection rate B when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate b when the win rate increase is not won, and when the win rate increase is won, a presentation pattern in which presentation B is executed with a high probability in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation is executed, so that after the win rate increase is won, presentations in which the presentation result is displayed frequently occur after presentation B is executed in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, allowing the player to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of a scenario that includes a presentation pattern that executes presentation B three or more times when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate when the win rate increase is not won, so that when the win rate increase is won, a presentation pattern that executes presentation B is executed with a high probability. However, in a configuration that does not have a scenario and determines the presentation pattern for each game, the probability that a presentation pattern that executes presentation B is determined in the games up until the time when the win rate increase is won and it is notified that the win rate increase has been won may be increased compared to the games up until the time when the win rate increase is not won and even in such a configuration, the frequent execution of presentations in which the presentation result is displayed after presentation B is executed in the win rate increase precursor presentation can give hope that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, effect A includes effect A1 and effect A2, which have different presentation modes, and effect B includes effect B1 and effect B2, which have different presentation modes, and the proportion of presentation modes that are executed varies depending on whether or not it is notified that a win rate increase has been won, so it is possible to draw attention to which presentation mode effect A and effect B are executed. In particular, in this embodiment, when it is notified that a win rate increase has been won, the proportion of effect A being executed in the presentation mode of effect A2 and the proportion of effect B being executed in the presentation mode of effect B2 are high, so it can be expected that the win rate will be controlled to increase by executing effect A and effect B in the presentation modes of effect A2 and effect B2.

In this embodiment, both effects A and B are effects that start based on the game start operation, so it is possible to draw attention to the type of effect that is executed when the game starts through the game start operation.

In this embodiment, performance A and performance B are performed by switching the performance image including the background image of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 from the performance image before the performance is executed, so that it is easy to recognize that performance A or performance B has been executed.

In this embodiment, even when the winning percentage increase premonition performance is not in progress, a performance pattern common to the performance patterns executed in each game that constitutes the scenario performance may be executed. However, unlike during the winning percentage increase premonition performance, the performance pattern across multiple games is not determined by the scenario, but rather the performance pattern is determined by lottery for each game. This prevents performance A from being executed consecutively and performance B from being executed consecutively intentionally, and suppresses the consecutive execution of performance A and the consecutive execution of performance B compared to when the performance pattern is determined by the scenario during the winning percentage increase premonition performance. This prevents the player from mistaking that the winning percentage increase premonition performance is in progress when it is not in progress.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the consecutive execution of effect A and the consecutive execution of effect B are suppressed by determining the effect pattern by lottery for each game except during the win percentage increase premonition effect. However, if effect A was executed in the previous game except during the win percentage increase premonition effect, the execution of effect A may be restricted, and if effect B was executed in the previous game except during the win percentage increase premonition effect, the execution of effect B may be restricted, thereby suppressing the consecutive execution of effect A and the consecutive execution of effect B except during the win percentage increase premonition effect. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the mistaken belief that the win percentage increase premonition effect is in progress except during the win percentage increase premonition effect.

In this embodiment, the following are included: a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the first stop operation is performed after presentation A; a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the first stop operation is performed after presentation B; a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the third stop operation or later is performed after presentation A; and a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the third stop operation or later is performed after presentation B. In a scenario in which the presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the third stop operation or later is performed is included three or more times in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the selection rate D when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate d when the win rate increase is not won. In the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation in which the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed with a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the third stop operation or later is performed with a high probability. Therefore, after the win rate increase is won, in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the frequent occurrence of the presentation in which the presentation result is displayed when the third stop operation or later is performed after presentation A or presentation B is performed, allows the player to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of a scenario that includes three or more performance patterns in which the performance result is displayed in response to an operation after the third stop operation is set higher when the win rate increase is won than when the win rate increase is not won. This configuration is such that when the win rate increase is won, the performance is executed with a high probability of the performance pattern in which the performance result is displayed in response to an operation after the third stop operation. However, in a configuration that does not have a scenario and determines the performance pattern in each game, the probability of determining the performance pattern in which the performance result is displayed in response to an operation after the third stop operation may be increased in the games up until the fact that the win rate increase has been won is notified when the win rate increase is won, compared to the games up until the fact that the win rate increase has not been won when the win rate increase is not won. Even in such a configuration, in the win rate increase precursor performance, after performance A or performance B is executed, the performance in which the performance result is displayed in response to an operation after the third stop operation occurs frequently, allowing players to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in this embodiment, for a scenario that includes three or more presentation patterns in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the selection rate C when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate c when the win rate increase is not won, and when the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed with a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation with a high probability in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, so that after the win rate increase is won, the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation have been executed, and then the presentation in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation occurs frequently, allowing the player to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of a scenario that includes three or more presentation patterns in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation is higher when the win rate increase is won than when the win rate increase is not won, so that when the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed with a high probability of the presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation. However, in a configuration that does not have a scenario and determines the presentation pattern in each game, the probability of the presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation in the games up until the fact that the win rate increase has been won when the win rate increase is won may be increased compared to the games up until the fact that the win rate increase has not been won when the win rate increase is not won. Even in such a configuration, in the win rate increase precursor presentation, after presentation A or presentation B is executed, the presentation in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation occurs frequently, allowing players to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, the timing at which the performance results are displayed is based on the player's operation, so the difference in the timing at which the performance results are displayed is easy to understand.

The timing at which the effect result is displayed is not limited to the timing based on the player's operation, but may be the timing based on the passage of time after effect A or effect B is executed.

In this embodiment, the performance result displayed after performance A or performance B is executed includes a small win notification that suggests the result of the internal lottery, so the result of the internal lottery can be recognized from the performance result displayed after performance A or performance B.

In this embodiment, both effects A and B are effects that begin based on the game start operation, so the difference in timing at which the subsequent effect results are displayed can be highlighted.

In this embodiment, even when the winning percentage increase premonition effect is not in progress, a common effect pattern may be executed in each game that constitutes the scenario effect. However, unlike during the winning percentage increase premonition effect, the effect pattern across multiple games is not determined by the scenario, but rather the effect pattern is determined by lottery for each game. This prevents the effect result from being displayed in succession as a result of the first stop operation or the effect result from being displayed in succession as a result of the third stop operation or later, and prevents the effect result from being displayed in succession as a result of the first stop operation or the effect result from being displayed in succession as a result of the third stop operation or later, compared to when the effect pattern is determined by the scenario during the winning percentage increase premonition effect. This prevents the effect from being mistakenly recognized as being in progress when it is not in progress.

In this embodiment, except during the win rate increase premonition performance, the performance pattern is determined by lottery for each game, so that the display of the performance result triggered by the first stop operation and the display of the performance result triggered by the third stop operation and onward are suppressed. However, if the performance result was displayed as a trigger of the first stop operation in the previous game except during the win rate increase premonition performance, the display of the performance result triggered by the first stop operation is restricted, and if the performance result was displayed as a trigger of the third stop operation and onward are suppressed, except during the win rate increase premonition performance, the display of the performance result triggered by the third stop operation and onward are suppressed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking that the win rate increase premonition performance is in progress except during the win rate increase premonition performance.

In this embodiment, the game includes a performance pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a performance result after performance A is executed, a performance pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a performance result after performance B is executed, a performance pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a performance result after performance A is executed, and a performance pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a performance result after performance B is executed. For a scenario in which the performance pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a performance result is included three or more times in the multiple games constituting the scenario performance of the win rate increase premonition performance, the selection rate E when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate e when the win rate increase is not won. When the win rate increase is won, the performance is executed with a performance pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a performance result with a high probability in the multiple games constituting the scenario performance. Therefore, after the win rate increase is won, in the multiple games constituting the scenario performance of the win rate increase premonition performance, the frequent occurrence of the performance in which the chance logo A is displayed as a performance result after performance A or performance B is executed can be expected to have won the win rate increase.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of a scenario that includes a performance pattern that displays the chance logo A as a performance result three or more times is set higher when the win rate increase is won than when the win rate increase is not won, so that when the win rate increase is won, the performance is executed with a high probability of the performance pattern that displays the chance logo A as a performance result. However, in a configuration that does not have a scenario and determines the performance pattern for each game, the probability of determining the performance pattern that displays the chance logo A as a performance result in the games until the fact that the win rate increase has been won when the win rate increase is won may be increased compared to the games until the fact that the win rate increase has not been won when the win rate increase is not won. Even in such a configuration, in the win rate increase precursor performance, after performance A or performance B is executed, the performance in which the chance logo A is displayed as a performance result occurs frequently, allowing players to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In addition, in this embodiment, for a scenario in which the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation include a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result three or more times, the selection rate F when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate f when the win rate increase is not won, and when the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed with a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result with a high probability in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation, so that after the win rate increase is won, the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation have been executed, and then the presentation in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result occurs frequently, allowing the player to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, the selection rate of a scenario that includes a performance pattern that displays the chance logo B as a performance result three or more times is set higher when the win rate increase is won than when the win rate increase is not won, so that when the win rate increase is won, the performance is executed with a high probability of the performance pattern that displays the chance logo B as a performance result. However, in a configuration that does not have a scenario and determines the performance pattern for each game, the probability of determining the performance pattern that displays the chance logo B as a performance result in the games until the fact that the win rate increase has been won when the win rate increase is won may be increased compared to the games until the fact that the win rate increase has not been won when the win rate increase is not won. Even in such a configuration, in the win rate increase precursor performance, after performance A or performance B is executed, the frequent occurrence of a performance in which the chance logo B is displayed as a performance result allows players to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, chance logo A includes chance logo A (small) and chance logo A (large) which have different presentation modes, and chance logo B includes chance logo B (small) and chance logo B (large) which have different presentation modes, and the proportion of presentation modes executed varies depending on whether or not it is notified that a win rate increase has been won, so it is possible to draw attention to which presentation mode the chance logo will be displayed in. In particular, in this embodiment, when it is notified that a win rate increase has been won, the proportion of the chance logo A (large) presentation mode and the proportion of the chance logo B (large) presentation mode are high, so it can be expected that the chance logo A (large) and chance logo B (large) will be displayed as presentation results, controlling the win rate increase.

In this embodiment, the performance result displayed after performance A or performance B is executed includes a small win notification that suggests the result of the internal lottery, so the result of the internal lottery can be recognized from the performance result displayed after performance A or performance B.

In this embodiment, both effects A and B are initiated based on the game start operation, and both effects A and B start at the same time, making it possible to highlight the differences between the chance logos A and B and the small win announcements that are subsequently displayed.

In this embodiment, even when the winning percentage increase premonition performance is not in progress, a performance pattern common to the performance patterns executed in each game that constitutes the scenario performance may be executed, but unlike when the winning percentage increase premonition performance is in progress, the performance pattern across multiple games is not determined by the scenario, but rather the performance pattern is determined by lottery for each game, and the chance logo A is not intentionally displayed consecutively as a performance result, and the chance logo B is not intentionally displayed consecutively as a performance result, and the chance logo A is not displayed consecutively as a performance result, and the chance logo B is not displayed consecutively as a performance result, compared to when the performance pattern is determined by the scenario during the winning percentage increase premonition performance, so that it is possible to prevent the winning percentage increase premonition performance from being mistakenly recognized as being in progress when it is not in progress.

In this embodiment, except during the win rate increase premonition performance, the performance pattern is determined by lottery for each game, thereby suppressing the consecutive display of the chance logo A as a performance result and the consecutive display of the chance logo B as a performance result. However, if the chance logo A was displayed as a performance result in the previous game except during the win rate increase premonition performance, the display of the chance logo A as a performance result may be restricted, and if the chance logo B was displayed as a performance result in the previous game except during the win rate increase premonition performance, the display of the chance logo B as a performance result may be restricted, thereby suppressing the consecutive display of the chance logo A as a performance result and the consecutive display of the chance logo B as a performance result except during the win rate increase premonition performance. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the misconception that the win rate increase premonition performance is in progress except during the win rate increase premonition performance.

In this embodiment, when displaying a win rate increase notification indicating that a win rate increase has been won in the final game of the win rate increase premonition performance, it is possible to control the timing of displaying the win rate increase notification to be triggered by the first stop operation, i.e., before the end of the game, and to control the timing of displaying the win rate increase notification to be triggered by an operation after the third stop operation, i.e., after the end of the game. Of these, the proportion of times that the control is performed to display the win rate increase notification before the end of the game differs depending on the type of win rate increase premonition performance, so that the win rate increase notification is displayed at a suitable timing depending on the type of win rate increase premonition performance, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The timing before the end of the game is not limited to the timing triggered by the first stop operation, but may be the timing triggered by the start operation, the timing triggered by the second stop operation (the operation that stops the reels second after the start of the game), or the timing triggered by a presentation operation before the third stop operation. Furthermore, the timing after the end of the game may be the timing triggered by any operation after the third stop operation, and may be the timing triggered by a presentation operation after the third stop operation, an operation to set the bet amount for the next game, or an operation to start the next game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a daytime background image that is the same as the normal effect, the percentage of control to display the win rate increase notice before the end of the game is higher than when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a night background image that is different from the normal effect, and the win rate increase notice is more likely to be displayed before the end of the game in the final game of the win rate increase premonition effect when a daytime background image that is the same as the background image before the win rate increase is won is displayed than when a night background image that is different from the background image before the win rate increase is won is displayed in the win rate increase premonition effect, thereby increasing the sense of surprise when the win rate increase notice is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the control to display the win percentage increase notification before the end of the game is more likely to be performed than when the win percentage increase notification is displayed five games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, and when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the win percentage increase notification is more likely to be displayed before the end of the game in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, which can increase the sense of surprise when the win percentage increase notification is displayed.

In this embodiment, when displaying a win rate increase notification indicating that a win rate increase has been won in the final game of the win rate increase premonition performance, it is possible to control the display of the win rate increase notification to be triggered by the first to third stop operations, i.e., a timing triggered by an operation related to the progress of the game, and to control the display of the win rate increase notification to be triggered by a performance operation, i.e., a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game. Of these, the proportion of times that the control to display the win rate increase notification is triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game differs depending on the type of win rate increase premonition performance, so that the win rate increase notification is displayed at a suitable timing depending on the type of win rate increase premonition performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Note that the timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game is not limited to a timing triggered by a performance operation after the game ends, but may also be a timing triggered by a performance operation before the game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a daytime background image that is the same as the normal effect, the win rate increase notification is more likely to be displayed at a timing triggered by an operation that is not related to the progress of the game than when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a night background image that is different from the normal effect, and the win rate increase notification is more likely to be displayed at a timing triggered by an operation that is not related to the progress of the game in the final game of the win rate increase premonition effect when a daytime background image that is the same as the background image before the win rate increase is won is displayed than when a night background image that is different from the background image before the win rate increase is displayed in the win rate increase premonition effect, thereby increasing the sense of surprise when the win rate increase notification is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the control to display the win percentage increase notification at a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game is more likely than when the win percentage increase notification is displayed five games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, and when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the win percentage increase notification is more likely to be displayed at a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, which can increase the sense of surprise when the win percentage increase notification is displayed.

In this embodiment, in a game in which a win rate increase transition lottery has been held to determine whether or not to transition to a win rate increase, a win rate increase transition lottery suggestion effect is executed, and a symbol combination of weak chance replay and strong chance replay is derived, suggesting that a win rate increase transition lottery has been held, so that players can expect a win rate increase announcement to be displayed in the final game of the subsequent win rate increase precursor effect.

In this embodiment, in the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor effect, a specific effect is executed in a different manner from the previous scenario effects, and the execution of the specific effect creates the expectation that a winning percentage increase notice will be displayed in that game.

In this embodiment, even when control is performed to display a win percentage increase notice before the end of the game in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, a specific performance is executed in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance in a different presentation mode from the presentation mode of the scenario presentation up to that point. However, when control is performed to display a win percentage increase notice before the end of the game in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, it is also possible to execute a presentation in a presentation mode that is the same as or similar to the presentation mode of the scenario presentation up to that point without executing a specific performance. With this configuration, when control is performed to display a win percentage increase notice before the end of the game in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, it is possible to increase the sense of surprise when the win percentage increase notice is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when control is performed to display a win percentage increase notification in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance at a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game, a specific presentation is executed in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance in a presentation mode different from the presentation mode of the scenario presentation up to that point. However, when control is performed to display a win percentage increase notification in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance at a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game, it is also possible to execute a presentation in a presentation mode that is the same as or similar to the presentation mode of the scenario presentation up to that point without executing a specific presentation. With such a configuration, when control is performed to display a win percentage increase notification in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance at a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game, it is possible to increase the sense of surprise when the win percentage increase notification is displayed.

In this embodiment, the bonus that is the subject of notification by the premonition effect is an increase in the winning rate, i.e., control to a state that is advantageous to the player. However, without being limited to this, the bonus that is the subject of notification by the premonition effect may be the right to increase the probability of winning the AT lottery in the subsequent CZ state, the right to be controlled to a state that is advantageous to the player, an increase in the period during which the state is controlled to be advantageous to the player, an increase in the value that can be acquired in an advantageous state, etc.

[About CZ/AT Premonitions]
Next, the CZ/AT precursor effects will be explained based on Figures 29 to 34.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the CZ/AT premonition effect is composed of a selection effect that is performed in the first game of a CZ/AT false premonition in a CZ/AT premonition state or in a normal state, and a CZ/AT suggestion effect that is performed from the second game to the final game of a CZ/AT false premonition in a CZ/AT premonition state or in a normal state.

The selection effect is an effect in which the type of CZ/AT suggestion effect to be executed next is selected from multiple types of CZ/AT suggestion effects. Each type of CZ/AT suggestion effect has a corresponding character, and by selecting one of the multiple characters in the selection effect, it is announced that the type of CZ/AT suggestion effect corresponding to the selected character will be executed next.

The CZ/AT suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the CZ state or AT state over multiple games, and ultimately notifies the player of one of the following results: a transition to the CZ state, a transition to the AT state, or no transition to either the CZ state or the AT state.

The sub-control unit 91 can determine the state of the next game based on commands sent from the main control unit 41; if it is in a normal state, it can determine whether it is a CZ/AT false premonition or the number of games remaining in the CZ/AT false premonition; if it is in a CZ/AT premonition state, it can determine the number of games remaining in the CZ/AT premonition state.

The sub-control unit 91 executes a selection effect in the first game of a CZ/AT premonition state or a CZ/AT false premonition state.

As shown in Figures 29(b) to (e), the selection presentation is mainly composed of a roulette part that is executed in response to the game start operation, and a selection part that is executed in response to the third stop operation or the presentation operation after the third stop operation. When transitioning from the roulette part to the selection part, a cut-in presentation or an operation instruction presentation may be included.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the selection performance is performed, the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is divided into three roughly equal parts in the left, middle, and right regions, and one of the characters A to C is displayed as a corresponding option in each of these regions. Note that FIG. 30 shows an example in which character A is displayed in the left region, character C is displayed in the middle region, and character B is displayed in the right region.

As shown in Figures 29(b) to (e), in the selection presentation, the roulette part is executed in response to the game start operation.

In the roulette part, as shown in Figure 30, each area lights up in the order of left area, center area, right area, left area, etc., creating an effect that suggests that one of the characters displayed in each area will be selected.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), when there is no cut-in effect or operation instruction effect, the roulette part is executed in response to the game start operation, and then the selection part is executed in response to the third stop operation.

In the selection part, as shown in FIG. 31(c), of the characters displayed in the left, center, and right areas, only the area of the selected character is displayed in a high brightness state, and the areas of the other characters are darkened to indicate that the selected character is identifiable, and then it is announced that a CZ/AT suggestion effect corresponding to the selected character will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), when a cut-in effect is involved, the roulette part is executed in response to the game start operation, and then the selection part is executed in response to the third stop operation in which a cut-in image is displayed on the front side of the left, middle, and right areas, as shown in FIG. 31(a).

As shown in FIG. 29(d), when an operation instruction presentation is included, the roulette part is executed in response to the game start operation, and then, as shown in FIG. 31(b), an operation instruction presentation is executed in response to the third stop operation, which displays an operation prompting image that prompts the player to perform the presentation operation, and then, the selection part is executed in response to the presentation operation using the presentation switch 56.

As shown in FIG. 29(e), when an operation instruction effect and a cut-in effect are included, the roulette part is executed in response to the game start operation, and then the operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 31(b) is executed in response to the third stop operation, and then the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 31(a) is executed in response to the effect operation using the effect switch 56, and then the selection part is executed.

When executing a CZ/AT precursor effect, the sub-control unit 91 first performs a character selection lottery to select a character for the CZ/AT suggestion effect depending on whether the CZ state or the AT state has been selected (whether the CZ/AT precursor state is selected or whether the CZ/AT false precursor state is selected).

As shown in FIG. 33, the ratio (T1/(T1+T2)) of the selection rate (T1) of character B when the CZ state or AT state is won to the combined probability (T1+T2) of the selection rate (T1) of character B when the CZ state or AT state is won and the selection rate (T2) of character B when the CZ state or AT state is not won is set higher than the ratio (S1/(S1+S2)) of the selection rate (S1) of character A when the CZ state or AT state is won to the combined probability (S1+S2) of the selection rate (S1) of character A when the CZ state or AT state is won and the selection rate (S2) of character A when the CZ state or AT state is not won, and it can be expected that the CZ state or AT state is won more often when the CZ/AT suggestion effect corresponding to character B is executed than when the CZ/AT suggestion effect corresponding to character A is executed. Additionally, since character C is only selected when the CZ or AT state is selected, when the CZ/AT suggestion effect corresponding to character C is executed, it is confirmed that the CZ or AT state has been selected.

In addition, in the selection performance, a character is selected for the CZ/AT suggestive performance that will be executed afterwards, so the character selected as a result of the selection performance will suggest the possibility of winning the CZ state or AT state, in addition to the type of CZ/AT suggestive performance.

The sub-control unit 91 also has multiple types of presentation patterns set that define the combination of characters to be displayed in each area in the selection presentation and the area that will be the selection result, and the sub-control unit 91 performs a presentation pattern selection lottery to select one of the multiple types of presentation patterns in which the area in which the character selected in the character selection lottery is displayed is the selection result, and displays the character combinations defined in the selected presentation pattern in each area and executes a selection presentation to select the area of the character that will be the selection result.

As shown in FIG. 32, the presentation patterns used for the selection presentation include a presentation pattern in which characters A, B, and C are displayed as options in three areas, i.e., a presentation pattern in which all the options in the three areas have different characters (ABC-A to ABC-C); a presentation pattern in which characters A, B, and B are displayed as options in three areas, a presentation pattern in which characters B, B, and C are displayed, a presentation pattern in which characters A, C, and C are displayed, and a presentation pattern in which characters B, C, and C are displayed, i.e., a presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in two of the three areas are the same (ABB-A to ABB-B, BBC-B to BBC-C, ACC-A to ACC-C, BCC-B to BCC-B); and a presentation pattern in which characters B, B, and B are displayed as options in three areas, a presentation pattern in which characters C, C, and C are displayed, i.e., a presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in the three areas are all the same (BBB-B, CCC-C).

As mentioned above, out of the three types of characters, character C is confirmed to be in the CZ state or AT state, and is therefore the one most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, character B is second only to character C in being in the CZ state or AT state, and character A is the one least likely to be in the CZ state or AT state out of the three types of characters.

The presentation pattern in which the characters in two of the three options are the same and the presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in the three areas are all the same include presentation patterns in which character C, who is most likely to win the CZ state or AT state, is displayed as an option in multiple areas. On the other hand, the presentation pattern in which the characters in two of the three options are the same and the presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in the three areas are all the same do not include presentation patterns in which character A, who is least likely to win the CZ state or AT state, is displayed as an option in multiple areas.

In addition, in presentation patterns where the characters in the options in two of the three areas are the same, and in presentation patterns where the characters in the options in all of the three areas are the same, the options with the same character always include the middle area, which is the most prominent of the left, middle, and right areas, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result.

For example, in a presentation pattern where the characters in the options in two areas are the same, or in a presentation pattern where the characters in the options in all three areas are the same, the options with the same character always include the middle area out of the left, middle, and right areas, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result.

In addition, in both presentation patterns where options in multiple areas result in character B, and where options in multiple areas result in character C, options with the same character always include the middle area out of the left, middle, and right areas, and when a character in one area of options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result.

In a presentation pattern in which the characters available in the three regions are all different, character C, the character most likely to achieve the CZ or AT state among the three types of characters, is displayed in the middle region, followed by character B, the character most likely to achieve the CZ or AT state, displayed in the right region, and character A, the character least likely to achieve the CZ or AT state, displayed in the left region.

On the other hand, in presentation patterns where the characters in the options in two of the three areas are the same and in presentation patterns where the characters in the options in all three areas are the same, the options with the same character always include the middle area, which is most likely to win the CZ state or AT state if the presentation pattern is such that the characters in the options in the left area, middle area, and right area are all different, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result.

As shown in FIG. 33, the ratio (O1/(O1+O2)) of the selection rate (O1) of the presentation pattern in which the options in the two areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is won to the total probability (O1+O2) of the selection rate (O1) of the presentation pattern in which the options in the two areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is won and the selection rate (O2) of the presentation pattern in which the options in the two areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is not won is set higher than the ratio (N1/(N1+N2)) of the selection rate (N1) of the presentation pattern in which the options in the three areas are all different characters when the CZ state or AT state is won to the total probability (N1+N2) of the selection rate (N1) of the presentation pattern in which the options in the three areas are all different characters when the CZ state or AT state is won and the selection rate (N2) of the presentation pattern in which the options in the three areas are all different characters when the CZ state or AT state is not won.

The ratio (P1/(P1+P2)) of the selection rate (P1) of the presentation pattern in which the two options in the two areas are character C when the CZ state or AT state is selected to the total probability (P1+P2) of the selection rate (P1) of the presentation pattern in which the two options in the two areas are character C when the CZ state or AT state is selected and the selection rate (P2) of the presentation pattern in which the two options in the two areas are character C when the CZ state or AT state is not selected is set higher than the ratio (O1/(O1+O2)) of the selection rate (O1) of the presentation pattern in which the two options in the two areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is selected to the total probability (O1+O2) of the selection rate (O1) of the presentation pattern in which the two options in the two areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is selected and the selection rate (O2) of the presentation pattern in which the two options in the two areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is not selected.

The ratio (Q1/(Q1+Q2)) of the selection rate (Q1) of the presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is selected to the total probability (Q1+Q2) of the selection rate (Q1) of the presentation pattern in which the options in three areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is selected and the selection rate (Q2) of the presentation pattern in which the options in three areas are character B when the CZ state or AT state is not selected is set higher than the ratio (P1/(P1+P2)) of the selection rate (P1) of the presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are character C when the CZ state or AT state is selected to the total probability (P1+P2) of the selection rate (P1) of the presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are character C when the CZ state or AT state is selected and the selection rate (P2) of the presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are character C when the CZ state or AT state is not selected.

In addition, the presentation pattern in which the three areas have character C as an option when the CZ or AT state is selected is only selected when the CZ or AT state is selected.

For this reason, a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character can be expected to result in a CZ state or an AT state, compared to a presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in the three areas are all different, and furthermore, a presentation pattern in which the options in the three areas have the same character can be expected to result in a CZ state or an AT state.

In addition, in a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are the same character in a selection presentation, a presentation pattern in which the options in both areas are character C is more likely to result in a CZ state or AT state than a presentation pattern in which the options in both areas are character B.

In addition, in a selection pattern where all three options in the selection presentation are the same character, a presentation pattern where all three options are character C is more likely to result in a CZ or AT state than a presentation pattern where all three options are character B.

As shown in FIG. 33, the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character (O3, P3) and the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character (Q3, R3) are selected are set higher than the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character (N3), i.e., the rate at which a selected part is executed as a result of a performance operation.

For this reason, the selection part is more likely to be executed in response to a presentation operation if a presentation pattern is selected in which the options in two areas have the same character, or if a presentation pattern is selected in which the options in all three areas have the same character, than if a presentation pattern is selected in which the characters in the options in all three areas are different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the execution rate of the cut-in effect when a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character (O4, P4) and when a presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character (Q4, R4) are selected are set higher than the execution rate of the cut-in effect when a presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas have different characters (N4).

For this reason, a cut-in effect is more likely to be executed when a presentation pattern is selected in which the choices in two areas have the same character, or when a presentation pattern is selected in which the choices in all three areas have the same character, than when a presentation pattern is selected in which the choices in all three areas have different characters.

As shown in FIG. 33, when an operation instruction performance is executed in a selection performance, i.e., when a selection part is executed as a result of a performance operation, the execution rate (V) of the cut-in performance is set to be higher than the execution rate (W) of the cut-in performance when an operation instruction performance is not executed, i.e., when a selection part is executed as a result of a first stop operation or a third stop operation.

For this reason, when a selection part is executed in response to a performance operation during a selection performance, it is easier for a cut-in performance to be executed than when the selection part is executed in response to a first stop operation or a third stop operation.

As shown in FIG. 34, when character A, who is least likely to win the CZ or AT state, is selected as the selection result of the selection performance, the rate at which the options in two areas are the same character and the options in all three areas are the same character is selected (X1) is set higher than the rate at which the options in two areas are the same character and the options in all three areas are the same character is selected (Y1) when character B, who is second after character C in being expected to win the CZ or AT state, is selected, and further, when character C, who is confirmed to win the CZ or AT state, is selected, the rate at which the options in two areas are the same character and the options in all three areas are the same character is selected (Z1) is set higher.

For this reason, the more a character that is expected to have won the CZ state or the AT state is selected as the selection result, the more likely it is that a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are the same character and the options in all three areas are the same character will be selected; in particular, when character C, which is confirmed to have won the CZ state or the AT state, is selected as the selection result, the more likely it is that a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are the same character and the options in all three areas are the same character will be selected than when another character is selected as the selection result.

In this embodiment, the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas during the selection presentation, suggesting a more advantageous situation than when different characters are displayed in each of the multiple areas, and when the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas during the selection presentation and any area in which the same character is displayed is selected, the same character is displayed in areas among the multiple areas, including the middle area, and only the middle area among the areas in which the same character is displayed is notified as the selection result, so that when the same character is displayed in multiple areas and any area in which the same character is displayed is selected, it is easy to recognize that fact.

In this embodiment, whether the selection presentation has characters in two areas that are the same or characters in all three areas that are the same, the options with the same character will always include the middle area of the left, middle, and right areas, and when any of the areas with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area will always be announced as the selection result. Therefore, when the same character is displayed in multiple areas and any of the areas displaying the same character is selected, it is easy to recognize that fact.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas during a selection presentation, the same character may be displayed in three areas, i.e., in all areas, which can suggest an advantageous situation from the appearance alone.

In this embodiment, whether in a presentation pattern in which the options in multiple areas in the selection presentation are character B or in a presentation pattern in which the options in multiple areas are character C, the options with the same character always include the middle area of the left, middle, and right areas, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result. Therefore, when the same character is displayed in multiple areas and any of the areas in which the same character is displayed is selected, it is easy to recognize that fact.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character (O3, P3) and the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character (Q3, R3) are selected are set higher than the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character (N3), i.e., the rate at which a selection part is executed as a result of a performance operation. This makes it easier for the selection result to be notified as a result of a performance operation when a performance pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character or when a performance pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character is selected than when a performance pattern in which the options in the three areas have all different characters is selected in the selection performance, and thus allows attention to be drawn to a situation in which the same character is displayed in multiple areas.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the cut-in effect when a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character (O4, P4) and when a presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character (Q4, R4) are set higher than the execution rate of the cut-in effect when a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character is selected (N4), and the cut-in effect is more likely to be executed when a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character and when a presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character are selected than when a presentation pattern in which the options in the three areas have different characters is selected in the selection presentation, so that it is possible to draw attention to a situation in which the same character is displayed in multiple areas.

In this embodiment, when an operation instruction presentation is executed in a selection presentation, i.e., when a selection part is executed as a result of a presentation operation, the execution rate (V) of a cut-in presentation is set to be higher than the execution rate (W) of a cut-in presentation when an operation instruction presentation is not executed, i.e., when a selection part is executed as a result of a first stop operation or a third stop operation. Therefore, when a selection result is announced as a result of a presentation operation by the player in a selection presentation, the selection result is more likely to be announced with a cut-in presentation than when the selection result is announced without being triggered by a presentation operation by the player, so that attention can be drawn to the situation in which a cut-in presentation is performed in a selection presentation.

In this embodiment, the presentation pattern in which the characters of the options in two of the three areas are the same and the presentation pattern in which the characters of the options in all three areas are the same do not include a presentation pattern in which character A, who is least likely to win the CZ state or AT state, is displayed as an option in multiple areas, and even in a situation in which the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas in the selection presentation suggesting an advantageous situation, the same characters displayed multiple times do not include character A, which suggests the lowest degree of advantageousness, so the player's expectations are not dampened by the displayed characters.

In addition, in this embodiment, the presentation pattern in which the characters of the options in two of the three areas are the same and the presentation pattern in which the characters of the options in all of the three areas are the same include a presentation pattern in which character C, which is most likely to win the CZ state or AT state, is displayed as an option in multiple areas, and in a situation in which the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas in the selection presentation suggesting an advantageous situation, the same character displayed multiple times includes character C, which is suggested to be the most advantageous, so the player's expectations can also be increased by the displayed characters.

In this embodiment, in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in the three regions are all different, character C, which is the most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state among the three types of characters, is displayed in the middle region, followed by character B, which is most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, displayed in the right region, and character A, which is least likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, displayed in the left region. On the other hand, in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in two of the three regions are the same and in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in all three regions are the same, the options with the same character will always include the middle region, which is most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, if the characters of the options in the left, middle, and right regions are all different, and when a character in one region of the options with the same character is announced as a selection result, the character in the middle region is always announced as a selection result. When selecting any of the regions in which the same character is displayed in the selection performance, the middle region in which a character that suggests a relatively high advantage when different characters are displayed is displayed is selected, so that the player can feel that a character that suggests a high advantage has been selected.

In this embodiment, in a presentation pattern in which the characters in two of the options in three areas are the same, and in a presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in all three areas are the same, the options with the same character always include the middle area, which is the most prominent of the left, middle, and right areas, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result. When selecting any area in which the same character is displayed in the selection presentation, the middle area, which is more prominent than the other areas, is selected, so that it is easy to recognize when any area in which the same character is displayed is selected.

In this embodiment, when selecting any area in which the same character is displayed in the selection presentation, a middle area that stands out more than the other areas is selected. However, if a region that stands out more than the other areas is selected when selecting any area in which the same character is displayed in the selection presentation, it will be easier to recognize that any area in which the same character is displayed has been selected.

A region that stands out more than other regions does not only mean the central region among multiple regions, but may also be a region that is larger than the other regions or a region located around the reel, such as the upper left region, upper right region, or the lower region among the lower regions, as shown in Figures 35(a) and (b).When selecting one of the regions in which the same character is displayed in the selection performance, by selecting a region that is larger than the other regions or a region located around the reel, it becomes easier to recognize that one of the regions in which the same character is displayed has been selected.

In this embodiment, the selection effect selects a character for the CZ/AT suggestion effect that will be executed subsequently, and depending on the character selected as a result of the selection effect, the type of CZ/AT suggestion effect as well as the possibility of winning the CZ state or AT state differs, so it is possible to draw attention to the character selected in the selection effect.

In this embodiment, when character C, which is confirmed to have won the CZ state or the AT state, is selected as the selection result, the presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are the same character and the presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas are the same character are more likely to be selected than when other characters are selected as the selection result, so that it can be expected that a special benefit will be awarded when character C is displayed.

[About 100-sheet signal output]
Next, the output of the 100 sheets signal will be described with reference to FIGS.

The main control unit 41 is equipped with a favorable zone net gain counter that counts the net gain in medals (favorable zone net gain) after the gain or loss in medals in the favorable zone changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, and as shown in FIG. 36, the favorable zone ends when the favorable zone net gain counted by the favorable zone net gain counter exceeds a second specified number (2400 in this embodiment). In the favorable zone, the transition from the normal state to the CZ state causes the net gain in medals to change from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, so that as shown in FIG. 36, the favorable zone net gain counter starts counting the favorable zone net gain when the net gain in medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend in the CZ state.

The main control unit 41 also has a signal counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (signal counter value), and as shown in FIG. 36, every time the signal counter value counted by the signal counter increases by 100 medals, the main control unit 41 controls the output of a 100 medal signal to the outside, indicating that the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state has increased by 100 medals.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main control unit 41 first controls the AT state to the first AT state, and controls the AT state to the second AT state after the first AT state ends. In addition, if the ED transition condition (in this embodiment, the net increase in the number of medals in the favorable zone exceeds 2000) is met in the second AT state, the main control unit 41 further controls the ED state, and after being controlled to the ED state, the net increase in the number of medals counted by the favorable zone net increase counter exceeds a second specified number (in this embodiment, 2400), ending the favorable zone, and the ED state and the AT state are also ended.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main control unit 41 starts counting the signal counter value with the signal counter when the first AT state starts. When the main control unit 41 transitions from the first AT state to the second AT state, the main control unit 41 takes over the signal counter value that was being counted in the first AT state and counts the signal counter value in the second AT state. When the main control unit 41 transitions from the second AT state to the ED state, the main control unit 41 takes over the signal counter value that was being counted in the second AT state and counts the signal counter value in the ED state.

Therefore, when transitioning from the first AT state to the second AT state, the 100 sheets signal is not output when the signal counter value has increased by 100 sheets since transitioning to the second AT state, but rather when the signal counter value has increased by 100 sheets since the last 100 sheets signal was output in the first AT state, and when transitioning from the second AT state to the ED state, the 100 sheets signal is not output when the signal counter value has increased by 100 sheets since transitioning to the ED state, but rather when the signal counter value has increased by 100 sheets since the last 100 sheets signal was output in the second AT state.

When the main control unit 41 transitions to the AT state, it controls the first AT state for 30 games, and then controls the second AT state for at least 10 games. The average net increase in number of medals per game in the AT state in this embodiment is about 3.9 medals regardless of whether it is the first AT state, the second AT state, or the ED state. Therefore, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired after the AT state begins and before the AT state ends is about 156 medals, and since it is possible to acquire more medals than the 100 medals required for the 100 medal signal to be output in the AT state, the 100 medal signal will be output at least once after the AT state begins and before the AT state ends.

In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the ED state in which the ED transition condition is met when the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2000 coins in the favorable zone, and continues until the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 coins. In this embodiment, the CZ state is controlled for a maximum of 20 games, and the average net increase in the number of coins per game in the CZ state is approximately 3.9 coins. Since the net increase in the favorable zone can start to be counted from the start of the CZ state, after 20 games of control in the CZ state, the net increase in the favorable zone when the AT state starts is approximately 78 coins. After the AT state begins, the ED transition condition is met when the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2000 coins. Therefore, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be won before the ED transition condition is met and the game transitions to the ED state after the AT state begins is approximately 1922 (2000-78). Since it is possible to win more medals than the 100 required for the 100-coin signal to be output in the AT state, the 100-coin signal will be output at least once after the AT state begins before the ED transition condition is met and the game transitions to the ED state.

Furthermore, the main control unit 41 controls the ED state when the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2000 coins after the AT state begins, and ends the AT state along with the favorable zone when the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 coins after transitioning to the ED state. Therefore, after transitioning to the ED state, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired before the ED state ends is approximately 400 coins, and since it is possible to acquire more medals than the 100 medals required for the 100 medal signal to be output in the AT state, the 100 medal signal will be output at least once after the ED state begins before the ED state ends.

In this embodiment, the signal counter counts the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (signal counter value), and a 100 medal signal is output each time the signal counter value in the AT state reaches 100 medals. By counting the number of 100 medal signals, it is possible to externally determine the number of medals increased in the AT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the AT state, the machine is first controlled to the first AT state, and after the first AT state ends, the machine is controlled to the second AT state. If the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second AT state, the machine is further controlled to the ED state. When the machine is controlled to the second AT state, the signal counter value counted by the signal counter in the first AT state is taken over and counted, and when the machine is controlled to the ED state, the signal counter value counted by the signal counter in the second AT state is taken over and counted. Therefore, even when the machine is shifted from the first AT state to the second AT state, or from the second AT state to the ED state, the signal counter value counted by the signal counter up to that point is taken over, and by counting the number of 100-piece signals, it is possible to accurately identify the number of medals that have increased since the AT state began.

In this embodiment, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired after the AT state starts and before the AT state ends is approximately 156 medals, and since it is possible to acquire more medals than the 100 medals required for the 100 medal signal to be output in the AT state, it is guaranteed that the 100 medal signal will be output at least once after the AT state starts and before the AT state ends. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the AT state has been controlled by the 100 medal signal.

In addition, in this embodiment, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired after transitioning to the ED state and before the ED state ends is approximately 400 medals, and since it is possible to acquire more medals than the 100 medals required until the 100 medals signal is output in the AT state, it is guaranteed that the 100 medals signal will be output at least once after the ED state begins and before the ED state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired after the AT state begins and before the ED transition condition is met and the state transitions to the ED state is approximately 1922 medals, and since it is possible to acquire more medals than the 100 medals required until the 100 medal signal is output in the AT state, it is guaranteed that the 100 medal signal will be output at least once after the AT state begins and before the ED transition condition is met and the state transitions to the ED state.

Therefore, after the AT state begins, the number of times the 100-sheet signal is output differs between when the AT state ends without the ED transition condition being satisfied and when the ED condition is satisfied and a transition to the ED state occurs (when the AT state ends without the ED transition condition being satisfied, the number of times the 100-sheet signal is output in the AT state is 1 to 19, and when the ED transition condition is satisfied and a transition to the ED state occurs, the number of times the 100-sheet signal is output in the AT state is 20 or more). Therefore, by counting the number of times the 100-sheet signal is output, it is possible to determine whether the AT state ended without a transition to the ED state or whether a transition to the ED state occurred.

[About medal counter update process]
Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the medal counter update process performed by the main control unit 41 to update the advantageous zone net increase number counter and the signal counter.

The medal counter update process first determines whether or not the game is in an advantageous zone (Sb1), and if it is not, the medal counter update process is terminated. If it is in an advantageous zone, it determines whether or not the game is in an AT state (Sb2).

If it is determined in step Sb2 that the game is not in the AT state, the process jumps to step Sb9. If it is determined that the game is in the AT state, the number of medals paid out, which is the number of medals awarded in the game, is obtained from a specified area of RAM 41c, and the obtained number of medals paid out is stored in register A (Sb3).

Then, the signal counter value is obtained from a predetermined area of RAM 41c, the obtained signal counter value is added to the A register (Sb4), the number of inserted medals used in the game is obtained from a predetermined area of RAM 41c, and the obtained number of inserted medals is subtracted from the value of the A register (Sb5). Then, it is determined from the value of the carry flag whether the value of the A register is 0 or greater or less than 0 (Sb6), and if the carry flag is 1, i.e., if the value of the A register is less than 0, the value of the A register is cleared (Sb7), the value of the A register is stored in the signal counter (Sb8), and the process proceeds to step Sb9. On the other hand, if the carry flag is 0 in step Sb5, i.e., if the value of the A register is 0 or greater, the value of the A register is not cleared, but is stored in the signal counter (Sb8), and the process proceeds to step Sb9.

In step Sb9, the counter value of the net increase in the advantageous zone is obtained, and the obtained counter value of the net increase in the advantageous zone is stored in the HL register. Next, the number of medals paid out for the game is obtained from a specified area of RAM 41c, and the obtained number of medals paid out is stored in the A register (Sb10). After that, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register (Sb11), the number of medals inserted in the game is obtained from a specified area of RAM 41c, and the obtained number of medals inserted is stored in the A register (Sb12), and the value of the A register is subtracted from the value of the HL register (Sb13).

Then, it is determined from the value of the carry flag whether the value of the HL register is greater than or equal to 0 or less than 0 (Sb14), and if the carry flag is 1, i.e., if the value of the HL register is less than 0, the value of the HL register is cleared (Sb15), the value of the A register is stored in the favorable zone net increase number counter (Sb16), and the medal counter update process is terminated. On the other hand, in step Sb14, if the carry flag is 0, i.e., if the value of the HL register is greater than or equal to 0, the value of the HL register is not cleared, but is stored in the favorable zone net increase number counter (Sb16), and the medal counter update process is terminated.

In this way, in this embodiment, when updating the signal counter, the number of medals paid out in the game is added to the signal counter value, and then the number of medals inserted in the game is subtracted. Therefore, even if the signal counter value is less than the number of medals inserted in the game, the signal counter value can be treated as a positive value.

In addition, in this embodiment, when updating the signal counter, the number of medals paid out in the game is added to the signal counter value, and if the result of subtracting the number of medals inserted in the game from the signal counter value is less than 0, the signal counter value is set to 0. Therefore, even if the result of adding the number of medals paid out as a result of the game to the signal counter value and subtracting the number of medals inserted in the game from the signal counter value is less than 0, there is no need to handle negative values.

In this embodiment, when updating the favorable zone net increase counter, the number of medals paid out in the game is added to the favorable zone net increase counter value, and then the number of medals inserted in the game is subtracted. Therefore, even if the favorable zone net increase counter is less than the number of medals inserted in the game, the favorable zone net increase counter value can be treated as a positive value.

In addition, in this embodiment, when updating the favorable zone net increase counter, the number of medals paid out in the game is added to the favorable zone net increase counter value, and if the result of subtracting the number of medals inserted in the game from the favorable zone net increase counter value is less than 0, the favorable zone net increase counter value is set to 0. Therefore, even if the result of adding the number of medals paid out as a result of the game to the favorable zone net increase counter value and subtracting the number of medals inserted in the game from the favorable zone net increase counter value is less than 0, there is no need to handle negative values.

In this embodiment, when updating the signal counter and when updating the advantageous zone net increase number counter, the number of medals paid out in the game and the number of medals inserted in the game are read separately and the signal counter and advantageous zone net increase number counter are updated, so there is no need to back up the number of medals paid out and the number of medals inserted that are read when updating the signal counter or the advantageous zone net increase number counter, and the processing is not complicated.

[100-sheet signal output processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the control content of the 100-piece signal output process that the main control unit 41 performs to output a 100-piece signal after updating the signal counter by the medal counter update process.

In the 100-coin signal output process, first it is determined whether or not the game is in an AT state (Sc1), and if the game is not in an AT state, the 100-coin signal output process is terminated. If the game is in an AT state in step Sc1, the signal counter value, i.e., the signal counter value after adding the increase in medals in the game, is obtained from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and it is determined whether the signal counter value is 100 or more (Sc2). If it is determined in step Sc2 that the signal counter value is less than 100, the 100-coin signal output process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2 that the signal counter value is equal to or greater than 100, 100 is subtracted from the signal counter value (Sc3), and the 100-coin signal is output (Sc4), and the 100-coin signal output process is terminated.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the signal counter value after adding the increase in medals to the signal counter value as the game progresses is 100 or more, a 100-coin signal is output and 100 is subtracted from the signal counter value. From the next game onwards, the increase in medals is added to the signal counter value after subtracting 100 medals, so the signal counter value never greatly exceeds 100, and it is possible to count the signal counter value for outputting the 100-coin signal every 100 medals using a small storage area (1 byte of storage area in this embodiment).

[Display of the winning number counter value and the net increase in the advantageous zone]
The sub-control unit 91 can specify whether the main control unit 41 side is controlled to be in the AT state, the number of medals paid out in each game, and the number of medals inserted in each game, based on commands sent from the main control unit 41. The sub-control unit 91 can also specify the net increase in the advantageous zone based on commands sent from the main control unit 41.

The sub-control unit 91 also has an acquired number display counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (acquired number display counter value) based on the number of medals paid out and the number of medals inserted, which are specified from the command sent from the main control unit 41, and is capable of displaying the acquired number display counter value counted by the acquired number display counter on the liquid crystal display 51.

As shown in FIG. 36, the sub-control unit 91 starts counting the acquired number display counter value from the game in which the AT state starts, and starts displaying the acquired number display counter value on the liquid crystal display 51. As described above, counting of the signal counter value by the signal counter for outputting the 100-coin signal also starts from the game in which the AT state starts, and the game in which counting of the acquired number display counter value by the acquired number display counter starts is the same as the game in which counting of the signal counter value by the signal counter starts. Therefore, after starting to display the acquired number display counter value on the liquid crystal display 51, the 100-coin signal can be output every time the acquired number display counter value becomes a multiple of 100.

In this embodiment, the ED state ends when the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 coins, but the counting of the net increase in the favorable zone starts from the game in which the medals increased after the transition to the CZ state, so the acquired number display counter value is a smaller value, and if the acquired number display counter value continues to be displayed even in the ED state, the ED state ends before the acquired number display counter value exceeds 2400 coins. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 36, the sub-control unit 91 displays the net increase in the favorable zone instead of the acquired number display counter value in the ED state. In addition, when switching from the second AT state presentation to the ED state presentation in conjunction with the transition from the second AT state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 switches the acquired number display counter value displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to the net increase in the favorable zone and displays it, so that the acquired number display counter value, which started counting when the AT state started, is displayed until the second AT state, and can be switched to display the net increase in the favorable zone at a timing that is difficult to notice.

When the sub-control unit 91 switches the acquired number display counter value displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to the net increase in the number of coins in the favorable zone, as shown in FIG. 39, at the start of the first game in which the game has transitioned from the second AT state to the ED state, the display screen is switched from the display screen for the second state presentation (FIG. 39(a)), in which the acquired number display counter value was displayed in the second AT state, to the display screen for the ED transition presentation (FIG. 39(b)), in which the acquired number display counter value is not displayed, and then from the game following the game in which the game has transitioned to the ED state, the display screen is switched to the display screen for the ED state presentation (FIG. 39(c)), in which the net increase in the number of coins in the favorable zone is displayed. As a result, the acquired number display counter value disappears for one game, and then the net increase in the number of coins in the favorable zone is displayed, so that the display can be switched from the acquired number display counter value to the display of the net increase in the favorable zone in a manner that is difficult to notice.

In addition, in the second AT state, only the acquired number display counter value is displayed, whereas after transitioning to the ED state, it is displayed as "profitable zone net increase in number of coins/2400", i.e., the net increase in number of coins in the profitable zone and 2400 at the end of the ED state are displayed side by side. Since the net increase in number of coins in the profitable zone is displayed in a different manner from the acquired number display counter value in the second AT state, it is difficult to notice that the counter value has switched from the acquired number display counter value to the net increase in number of coins in the profitable zone.

[Control of the provision of benefits in ED state]
Next, the control regarding the provision of the privilege in the ED state will be described based on a number of modes.

[First form]
A first embodiment of the control regarding the provision of a privilege in the ED state will be described with reference to FIG. 40 and FIG.

In the first form, the main control unit 41 controls the ED state so that the ED transition condition is met when the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2,000 coins after the AT state begins, and the ED state continues until the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2,400 coins and the favorable zone ends.

In the first form, the sub-control unit 91 is equipped with an acquired number display counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (acquired number display counter value), and can display the acquired number display counter value counted by the acquired number display counter on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 displays the net increase in the favorable zone instead of the acquired number display counter value in the ED state. In addition, in the first form, when switching from the second AT state presentation to the ED state presentation as the second AT state transitions to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 switches the acquired number display counter value displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to the net increase in the favorable zone, and can switch to displaying the net increase in the favorable zone at a timing that is difficult to notice, while displaying the acquired number display counter value that started counting when the AT state started until the second AT state.

In addition, in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 displays "Net increase in number of coins in favorable zone/2400" on the liquid crystal display 51, and is displayed in a manner that suggests both the net increase in number of coins in the favorable zone and "2400", which will be the number at which the ED state will end. From the suggested net increase in number of coins in the favorable zone and "2400", which will be the number at which the ED state will end, the player can recognize the period until the ED state ends.

In addition, in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 can determine whether the main control unit 41 is in an ED state or not and can identify the setting value as a result of an internal lottery based on a command sent from the main control unit 41, and can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value as a bonus if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won in the ED state.

Furthermore, a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is a condition for a third add-on lottery that adds to the number of games controlled to the second AT state in the second AT state before transitioning to the ED state. In this way, in the first form, if the condition that triggers the execution of the setting suggestion presentation in the ED state is before the ED transition condition is met, the winning of a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay will result in control (third add-on lottery) to extend the period controlled to the second AT state, so it is possible to draw attention to the fact that a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay will be won.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 performs a setting suggestion lottery when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is won in the ED state, and executes a setting suggestion presentation when the setting suggestion lottery is won.

In addition, in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 executes a chance replay suggestion display as shown in FIG. 41(a) when a weak chance replay or strong chance replay, which triggers a setting suggestion lottery, is won, and if the setting suggestion lottery is won, executes a setting suggestion display that suggests a setting value using a display image, triggered by the third stop operation, as shown in FIG. 41(b). On the other hand, if the setting suggestion lottery is not won, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute a setting suggestion display even if the third stop operation is performed, as shown in FIG. 41(c).

The ED state ends when the net increase in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400 coins, but if the player ignores the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and performs a stop operation using an operation mode different from the notified operation mode, it is possible to suppress the increase in coins and prolong the period during which the ED state is controlled.

In contrast, in the first form, as shown in Figures 40(a) and (b), after transitioning to the ED state, until a specific period of time has elapsed, the sub-control unit 91 conducts a setting suggestion lottery if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, and executes a setting suggestion presentation if the setting suggestion lottery is won, but after the specific period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 40(b), even if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, the sub-control unit 91 does not conduct a setting suggestion lottery or execute a setting suggestion presentation.

For this reason, if the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the game has been controlled to the ED state, the setting suggestion performance will no longer be executed after a specific period of time has elapsed, preventing the game from intentionally extending the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state for the purpose of granting a special bonus.

In addition, in the first form, if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won after a specific period of time has passed, no setting suggestion lottery is held and no setting suggestion effect is executed, but the chance replay suggestion effect is executed, so that even if control is set so that the setting suggestion effect is not executed even if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity when a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won.

In addition, in the first form, the ED state is controlled when the net increase in the advantageous zone exceeds 2000 coins, so after the ED state begins, the number of medals required until the net increase in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 coins and the ED state ends is 400 coins, and the specific period is set to 120 games, which is more than the number of games (approximately 103 games) obtained by dividing 400 coins by the net increase in coins per game of approximately 3.9 coins. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly performs a stop operation in a manner that suppresses the increase in coins, if there are only one or two mistakes, the ED state will end before the specific period is exceeded, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantage.

In the first form, a setting suggestion effect is applied as a bonus given in the ED state, but an effect that is only executed in the ED state may be applied as a bonus. Also, a bonus that is actually advantageous to the player, such as the right to be controlled to a state that is advantageous to the player after the ED state ends, may be applied.

[Second embodiment]
The second embodiment of the control regarding the provision of the privilege in the ED state will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Note that the second embodiment includes controls common to the first embodiment, and therefore differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described here.

In the second form, the main control unit 41 includes multiple types of normal replays, and when any type of normal replay is selected, performs control to stop the combination of normal replays by performing a stop operation in a specific stop order other than that according to the type of normal replay, and performs control to stop the combination of specific replays by performing a stop operation in a specific stop order according to the type of normal replay.

In the first form, the sub-control unit 91 executes a setting suggestion lottery when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is won in the ED state, and executes a setting suggestion presentation when the setting suggestion lottery is won, whereas in the second form, as shown in FIG. 42, when any type of normal replay is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a specific navigation lottery to decide whether or not to execute a specific navigation that notifies a specific stopping order according to the type of normal replay, executes the specific navigation if the specific navigation lottery is won, and executes the setting suggestion presentation when the player performs the stopping operation in the stopping order notified by the specific navigation, and a combination of specific replays stops.

On the other hand, in the second form, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute the specific navigation if the specific navigation lottery is not won when any type of normal replay is won, and in this case, regardless of whether the specific replay combination stops, does not execute the setting suggestion presentation either. Also, in the second form, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute the setting suggestion presentation either if the specific navigation lottery is won when any type of normal replay is won and the specific navigation is executed, but the player performs the stop operation in a stop order different from the stop order notified by the specific navigation, and the specific replay combination does not stop.

In addition, in the second form, as shown in FIG. 42, after transitioning to the ED state, until a specific period has elapsed, the sub-control unit 91 executes a setting suggestion presentation when a specific navigation lottery is won when any type of normal replay is won, the specific navigation is executed, and the specific replay combination stops. However, after the specific period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 42, even if any type of normal replay is won, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute a specific navigation lottery, and does not execute a setting suggestion presentation regardless of whether or not the specific replay combination stops.

For this reason, if the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the game has been controlled to the ED state, even if any type of normal replay is selected after the specific period has elapsed, the specific navigation lottery will not be performed, specific navigation will not be performed, and the combination of specific replays that is the condition for the setting suggestion performance will not be stopped, thereby preventing the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state from being intentionally extended for the purpose of granting a bonus.

Also, in the second form, the specific period is set to 120 games, which is more than the number of games (approximately 103 games) obtained by dividing 400 medals, the number of medals required until the ED state ends, by the net increase in medals per game of approximately 3.9 medals. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly performs a stop operation in a manner that suppresses the increase in medals, if the mistake is made once or twice, the ED state will end before the specific period is exceeded, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantage.

In addition, in the second form, a specific navigation lottery is held when any type of normal replay is won in the second AT state, and if the specific navigation lottery is won and the specific navigation is executed and the specific replay combination stops, an additional lottery is held in the second AT state to add to the number of games controlled to the second AT state.By configuring in this way, the conditions that trigger the setting suggestion performance to be executed in the ED state will be the same as the conditions that cause control (additional lottery) to be performed to extend the period controlled to the second AT state if the ED transition condition is not met, so that attention can be drawn to the fact that the specific navigation is executed and the specific replay combination stops.

[Third Form]
The third embodiment of the control regarding the provision of the privilege in the ED state will be described with reference to Fig. 43. Since the third embodiment includes the control common to the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the differences from the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be mainly described here.

In the first and second forms, the main control unit 41 was configured to continue control over the ED state after the start of the ED state until the favorable zone net increase in number of coins exceeded 2400 coins and the favorable zone ended, but in the third form, the main control unit 41 ends the ED state when a specific period of time has elapsed after the start of the ED state, not only when the favorable zone net increase in number of coins exceeded 2400 coins after the start of the ED state, but also when the favorable zone net increase in number of coins is 2400 coins or less, as shown in FIG. 43.

For this reason, if the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the game has been controlled to the ED state, the ED state itself will end after a specific period of time has elapsed, so it is possible to prevent the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state from being extended intentionally for the purpose of granting a special benefit.

Also, in the third form, the specific period is set to 120 games, which is more than the number of games (approximately 103 games) obtained by dividing 400 medals, which is the number of medals required until the ED state ends, by the net increase in medals per game of approximately 3.9 medals. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly performs a stop operation in a manner that suppresses the increase in medals, if the mistake is made once or twice, the ED state will end before the specific period is exceeded, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantage.

[Fourth Form]
A fourth embodiment of the control regarding the provision of a privilege in the ED state will be described with reference to FIG.

In the fourth form, the main control unit 41 controls the ED transition condition to be met when the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2,000 coins after the AT state begins, and controls the ED state to continue until the net increase in the favorable zone exceeds 2,400 coins and the favorable zone ends.

In the fourth form, the sub-control unit 91 is equipped with an acquired number display counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (acquired number display counter value), and can display the acquired number display counter value counted by the acquired number display counter on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, in the fourth form, the sub-control unit 91 displays the net increase in the favorable zone instead of the acquired number display counter value in the ED state. In addition, in the fourth form, when switching from the second AT state presentation to the ED state presentation as the second AT state transitions to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 switches the acquired number display counter value displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to the net increase in the favorable zone and displays it, and can switch to displaying the net increase in the favorable zone at a timing that is difficult to notice while displaying the acquired number display counter value that started counting when the AT state started until the second AT state.

In addition, in the fourth form, the sub-control unit 91 displays "Net increase in number of coins in favorable zone/2400" on the liquid crystal display 51, and is displayed in a manner that suggests both the net increase in number of coins in the favorable zone and "2400", which will be the number at which the ED state will end. From the suggested net increase in number of coins in the favorable zone and "2400", which will be the number at which the ED state will end, the player can recognize the period until the ED state ends.

In addition, in the fourth form, the sub-control unit 91 can determine whether the main control unit 41 is in an ED state or not and can identify the setting value as a result of an internal lottery based on a command sent from the main control unit 41, and can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value as a bonus if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won in the ED state.

Furthermore, a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is a condition for a third add-on lottery that adds to the number of games controlled to the second AT state in the second AT state before transitioning to the ED state. In this way, in the fourth form, if the condition that triggers the execution of the setting suggestion presentation in the ED state is before the ED transition condition is met, the winning of a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay will result in control (third add-on lottery) to extend the period controlled to the second AT state, so it is possible to draw attention to the fact that a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay will be won.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the fourth form, the sub-control unit 91 performs a setting suggestion lottery when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is selected in the ED state, and executes a setting suggestion presentation when the setting suggestion lottery is selected.

In addition, in the fourth form, when a weak chance replay or strong chance replay, which triggers a setting suggestion lottery, is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a chance replay suggestion display as shown in FIG. 41(a), and if the setting suggestion lottery is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a setting suggestion display that suggests a setting value using a display image as a trigger of the third stop operation as shown in FIG. 41(b). On the other hand, if the setting suggestion lottery is not won, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute a setting suggestion display even if the third stop operation is performed as shown in FIG. 41(c).

The ED state ends when the net increase in the advantageous zone exceeds 2,400 coins, but if the player ignores the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and performs a stop operation using an operation mode different from the notified operation mode, it is possible to suppress the increase in coins and prolong the period during which the ED state is controlled.

In response to this, in the fourth form, as shown in FIG. 44, when a navigation minor feature or specific minor feature is won and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from that notified by the navigation notification, i.e., an operation mode that suppresses the increase in medals, the sub-control unit 91 controls the game to a penalty period, and during the penalty period, even if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, no setting suggestion lottery is conducted and no setting suggestion performance is executed.

For this reason, if the period during which the player is controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the ED state is entered, the setting suggestion effect will not be executed even if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, so it is possible to prevent the period during which the player is controlled to the ED state from being intentionally extended for the purpose of granting a special bonus.

In addition, in the fourth form, as shown in FIG. 44, the sub-control unit 91 controls the penalty period when a navigation minor win or specific minor win is won and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, and during the penalty period, even if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, the setting suggestion lottery is not performed and the setting suggestion presentation is not executed, but if the penalty period release condition is met (for example, 10 games have passed since the start of the penalty period), the setting suggestion presentation is executed if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, and the setting suggestion presentation is executed if the setting suggestion lottery is won. Therefore, even if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, there is no excessive disadvantage.

In addition, in the fourth form, if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won during the penalty period, no setting suggestion lottery is held and no setting suggestion effect is executed, but the chance replay suggestion effect is executed, so that even if control is set so that the setting suggestion effect is not executed even if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity when a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won.

In the fourth mode, a setting suggestion effect is applied as a bonus given in the ED state, but an effect that is only executed in the ED state may be applied as a bonus. Also, a bonus that is actually advantageous to the player, such as the right to be controlled to a state that is advantageous to the player after the ED state ends, may be applied.

[Fifth Form]
The fifth embodiment of the control regarding the provision of the privilege in the ED state will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Note that the fifth embodiment includes controls common to the fourth embodiment, and therefore differences from the fourth embodiment will be mainly described here.

In the fifth form, the main control unit 41 includes multiple types of normal replays, and when any type of normal replay is selected, performs control to stop the combination of normal replays by performing a stop operation in a specific stop order other than that according to the type of normal replay, and performs control to stop the combination of specific replays by performing a stop operation in a specific stop order according to the type of normal replay.

In the fourth form, the sub-control unit 91 executes a setting suggestion lottery when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is won in the ED state, and executes a setting suggestion presentation when the setting suggestion lottery is won, whereas in the fifth form, as shown in FIG. 45, the sub-control unit 91 executes a specific navigation lottery to decide whether or not to execute a specific navigation that notifies a specific stopping order according to the type of normal replay when any type of normal replay is won, executes the specific navigation if the specific navigation lottery is won, and executes the setting suggestion presentation when the player performs the stopping operation in the stopping order notified by the specific navigation, and the specific replay combination stops.

On the other hand, in the fifth form, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute the specific navigation if the specific navigation lottery is not won when any type of normal replay is won, and in this case, regardless of whether the specific replay combination stops, does not execute the setting suggestion presentation either. Also, in the fifth form, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute the setting suggestion presentation either if the specific navigation lottery is won when any type of normal replay is won and the specific navigation is executed, but the player performs the stop operation in a stop order different from the stop order notified by the specific navigation, and the specific replay combination does not stop.

In addition, in the fifth form, as shown in FIG. 45, when a navigation minor feature or specific minor feature is won and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, that is, an operation mode that suppresses the increase in medals, the sub-control unit 91 controls the game to a penalty period, and during the penalty period, even if any type of normal replay is won, a specific navigation lottery is not performed, and setting suggestion performance is not executed regardless of whether a specific replay combination is stopped or not.

For this reason, if the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the game has been controlled to the ED state, even if any type of normal replay is selected, the specific navigation lottery will not be performed, specific navigation will not be performed, and the combination of specific replays that is the condition for the setting suggestion performance will not be stopped, so it is possible to prevent the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state from being intentionally extended for the purpose of granting a bonus.

In addition, in the fifth form, as shown in FIG. 45, when a navigation minor or specific minor win is won and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from that notified by the navigation notification, the sub-control unit 91 controls the penalty period, and during the penalty period, even if any type of normal replay is won, a specific navigation lottery is not performed, and regardless of whether a specific replay combination is stopped, a setting suggestion effect is not executed. However, if the penalty period release condition (for example, 10 games have passed since the start of the penalty period) is subsequently met, a specific navigation lottery is executed if any type of normal replay is won, a specific navigation is executed if the specific navigation lottery is won, and a setting suggestion effect is executed if a specific replay combination is stopped. Therefore, even if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from that notified by the navigation notification, there is no excessive disadvantage.

In addition, in the fifth form, when any type of normal replay is won in the second AT state, a specific navigation lottery is held, and if the specific navigation lottery is won and the specific replay combination is stopped, an additional lottery is held in the second AT state to add to the number of games controlled to the second AT state. With this configuration, the conditions that trigger the setting suggestion performance to be executed in the ED state will be the same as the conditions that cause control (additional lottery) to be performed to extend the period controlled to the second AT state if the ED transition condition is not met, so that attention can be drawn to the fact that the specific navigation is executed and the specific replay combination is stopped.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, when displaying a win percentage increase notification indicating that a win percentage increase has been won in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, it is possible to control the timing of displaying the win percentage increase notification to be triggered by the first stop operation, i.e., before the end of the game, and to control the timing of displaying the win percentage increase notification to be triggered by an operation after the third stop operation, i.e., after the end of the game. Of these, the proportion of times that the control is performed to display the win percentage increase notification before the end of the game differs depending on the type of win percentage increase premonition performance, so that the win percentage increase notification is displayed at an appropriate timing depending on the type of win percentage increase premonition performance, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a daytime background image that is the same as the normal effect, the percentage of control to display the win rate increase notice before the end of the game is higher than when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a night background image that is different from the normal effect, and the win rate increase notice is more likely to be displayed before the end of the game in the final game of the win rate increase premonition effect when a daytime background image that is the same as the background image before the win rate increase is won is displayed than when a night background image that is different from the background image before the win rate increase is won is displayed in the win rate increase premonition effect, thereby increasing the sense of surprise when the win rate increase notice is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the control to display the win percentage increase notification before the end of the game is more likely to be performed than when the win percentage increase notification is displayed five games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance. When the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the win percentage increase notification is more likely to be displayed before the end of the game in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, which increases the sense of surprise when the win percentage increase notification is displayed.

In this embodiment, in a game in which a win rate increase transition lottery has been held to determine whether or not to transition to a win rate increase, a win rate increase transition lottery suggestion effect is executed, and a symbol combination of weak chance replay and strong chance replay is derived, suggesting that a win rate increase transition lottery has been held, so that players can expect a win rate increase announcement to be displayed in the final game of the subsequent win rate increase precursor effect.

In this embodiment, when the winning percentage increase notice is displayed in the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor effect as a result of the third stop operation or later, a specific effect is executed in a different presentation mode from the presentation mode of the scenario effect up to that point, and the execution of the specific effect creates the expectation that the winning percentage increase notice will be displayed in that game.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, when displaying a win percentage increase notification indicating that a win percentage increase has been won in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, it is possible to control the display of the win percentage increase notification at a timing triggered by the first to third stop operations, i.e., a timing triggered by an operation related to the progress of the game, and to control the display of the win percentage increase notification at a timing triggered by a performance operation, i.e., a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game. Of these, the proportion of times that the control is performed to display the win percentage increase notification at a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game varies depending on the type of win percentage increase premonition performance, so that the win percentage increase notification is displayed at a suitable timing depending on the type of win percentage increase premonition performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a daytime background image that is the same as the normal effect, the win rate increase notification is more likely to be displayed at a timing triggered by an operation that is not related to the progress of the game than when the win rate increase premonition effect is executed with a night background image that is different from the normal effect, and the win rate increase notification is more likely to be displayed at a timing triggered by an operation that is not related to the progress of the game in the final game of the win rate increase premonition effect when a daytime background image that is the same as the background image before the win rate increase is won is displayed than when a night background image that is different from the background image before the win rate increase is displayed in the win rate increase premonition effect, thereby increasing the sense of surprise when the win rate increase notification is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the control to display the win percentage increase notification at a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game is more likely than when the win percentage increase notification is displayed five games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, and when the win percentage increase notification is displayed four games after the start of the win percentage increase premonition performance, the win percentage increase notification is more likely to be displayed at a timing triggered by an operation unrelated to the progress of the game in the final game of the win percentage increase premonition performance, which can increase the sense of surprise when the win percentage increase notification is displayed.

In this embodiment, in a game in which a win rate increase transition lottery has been held to determine whether or not to transition to a win rate increase, a win rate increase transition lottery suggestion effect is executed, and a symbol combination of weak chance replay and strong chance replay is derived, suggesting that a win rate increase transition lottery has been held, so that players can expect a win rate increase announcement to be displayed in the final game of the subsequent win rate increase precursor effect.

In this embodiment, when the winning percentage increase notice is displayed in the final game of the winning percentage increase precursor effect as a result of the third stop operation or later, a specific effect is executed in a different presentation mode from the presentation mode of the scenario effect up to that point, and the execution of the specific effect creates the expectation that the winning percentage increase notice will be displayed in that game.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, the present invention includes a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the first stop operation is triggered after the execution of presentation A, a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the first stop operation is triggered after the execution of presentation B, a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the third stop operation or later is triggered after the execution of presentation A, and a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed when the third stop operation or later is triggered after the execution of presentation B. For a scenario in which the presentation pattern in which presentation A is executed is included three or more times in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the selection rate A when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate a when the win rate increase is not won, and when the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed with a presentation pattern in which presentation A is executed with a high probability in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation. Therefore, after the win rate increase is won, in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the presentation in which the presentation result is displayed after presentation A is executed occurs frequently, so that it can be expected that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, for a scenario in which a presentation pattern for executing presentation B is included three or more times in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the selection rate B when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate b when the win rate increase is not won, and when the win rate increase is won, a presentation pattern in which presentation B is executed with a high probability is executed in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, so that after the win rate increase is won, presentation in which the presentation result is displayed frequently occurs after presentation B is executed in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, allowing the player to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, effect A includes effect A1 and effect A2, which are different in effect mode, and effect B includes effect B1 and effect B2, which are different in effect mode, and the proportion of effect modes that are executed varies depending on whether or not a notification that a win rate increase has been won, so that attention can be drawn to in which effect mode effect A and effect B are executed.

In this embodiment, both effects A and B are effects that start based on the game start operation, so it is possible to draw attention to the type of effect that is executed when the game starts through the game start operation.

In this embodiment, performance A and performance B are performed by switching the performance image including the background image of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51 from the performance image before the performance is executed, so that it is easy to recognize that performance A or performance B has been executed.

In this embodiment, even when the winning percentage increase premonition performance is not in progress, a performance pattern common to the performance patterns executed in each game that constitutes the scenario performance may be executed. However, unlike during the winning percentage increase premonition performance, the performance pattern across multiple games is not determined by the scenario, but rather the performance pattern is determined by lottery for each game. This prevents performance A from being executed consecutively and performance B from being executed consecutively intentionally, and suppresses the consecutive execution of performance A and the consecutive execution of performance B compared to when the performance pattern is determined by the scenario during the winning percentage increase premonition performance. This prevents the player from mistaking that the winning percentage increase premonition performance is in progress when it is not in progress.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the present invention includes a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed with the first stop operation as a trigger after the execution of presentation A, a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed with the first stop operation as a trigger after the execution of presentation B, a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed with the third stop operation or later as a trigger after the execution of presentation A, and a presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed with the third stop operation or later as a trigger after the execution of presentation B. For a scenario in which the presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed with the third stop operation or later as a trigger is included three or more times in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the selection rate D when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate d when the win rate increase is not won. When the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed with the presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed with the third stop operation or later as a trigger with a high probability in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation. Therefore, after the win rate increase is won, in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the frequent occurrence of the presentation in which the presentation result is displayed with the third stop operation or later as a trigger after the execution of presentation A or presentation B causes the player to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, for a scenario that includes three or more presentation patterns in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the selection rate C when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate c when the win rate increase is not won, and when the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed in the presentation pattern in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation with high probability in the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation, so that after the win rate increase is won, the multiple games that make up the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation have been executed, and then the presentation in which the presentation result is displayed in response to the first stop operation occurs frequently, allowing the player to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, the timing at which the performance results are displayed is based on the player's operation, so the difference in the timing at which the performance results are displayed is easy to understand.

In this embodiment, the performance result displayed after performance A or performance B is executed includes a small win notification that suggests the result of the internal lottery, so the result of the internal lottery can be recognized from the performance result displayed after performance A or performance B.

In this embodiment, both effects A and B are effects that begin based on the game start operation, so the difference in timing at which the subsequent effect results are displayed can be highlighted.

In this embodiment, even when the winning percentage increase premonition effect is not in progress, a common effect pattern may be executed in each game that constitutes the scenario effect. However, unlike during the winning percentage increase premonition effect, the effect pattern across multiple games is not determined by the scenario, but rather the effect pattern is determined by lottery for each game. This prevents the effect result from being displayed in succession as a result of the first stop operation or the effect result from being displayed in succession as a result of the third stop operation or later, and prevents the effect result from being displayed in succession as a result of the first stop operation or the effect result from being displayed in succession as a result of the third stop operation or later, compared to when the effect pattern is determined by the scenario during the winning percentage increase premonition effect. This prevents the effect from being mistakenly recognized as being in progress when it is not in progress.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the present invention includes a presentation pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a presentation result after presentation A is executed, a presentation pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a presentation result after presentation B is executed, a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result after presentation A is executed, and a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result after presentation B is executed. For a scenario in which the presentation pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a presentation result is included three or more times in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the selection rate E when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate e when the win rate increase is not won. When the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed with the presentation pattern in which the chance logo A is displayed as a presentation result with a high probability in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation. Therefore, after the win rate increase is won, in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation, the frequent occurrence of the presentation in which the chance logo A is displayed as a presentation result after presentation A or presentation B is executed can provide an expectation that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, for a scenario in which the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation include a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result three or more times, the selection rate F when the win rate increase is won is set higher than the selection rate f when the win rate increase is not won, and when the win rate increase is won, the presentation is executed with a presentation pattern in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result with a high probability in the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation, so that after the win rate increase is won, the multiple games constituting the scenario presentation of the win rate increase premonition presentation have been executed, and then the presentation in which the chance logo B is displayed as a presentation result occurs frequently, allowing the player to expect that the win rate increase has been won.

In this embodiment, chance logo A includes chance logo A (small) and chance logo A (large) which have different presentation modes, and chance logo B includes chance logo B (small) and chance logo B (large) which have different presentation modes, and the proportion of presentation modes executed varies depending on whether or not it is notified that a win rate increase has been won, so it is possible to draw attention to which presentation mode the chance logo will be displayed in. In particular, in this embodiment, when it is notified that a win rate increase has been won, the proportion of the chance logo A (large) presentation mode and the proportion of the chance logo B (large) presentation mode are high, so it can be expected that the chance logo A (large) and chance logo B (large) will be displayed as presentation results, controlling the win rate increase.

In this embodiment, the performance result displayed after performance A or performance B is executed includes a small win notification that suggests the result of the internal lottery, so the result of the internal lottery can be recognized from the performance result displayed after performance A or performance B.

In this embodiment, both effects A and B are initiated based on the game start operation, and both effects A and B start at the same time, making it possible to highlight the differences between the chance logos A and B and the small win announcements that are subsequently displayed.

In this embodiment, even when the winning percentage increase premonition effect is not in progress, a performance pattern common to the performance patterns executed in each game that constitutes the scenario performance may be executed, but unlike when the winning percentage increase premonition effect is in progress, the performance pattern across multiple games is not determined by the scenario, but rather the performance pattern is determined by lottery for each game, and the chance logo A is not intentionally displayed consecutively as a performance result, and the chance logo B is not intentionally displayed consecutively as a performance result, and the chance logo A is not displayed consecutively as a performance result, and the chance logo B is not displayed consecutively as a performance result, compared to when the performance pattern is determined by the scenario during the winning percentage increase premonition effect, so that it is possible to prevent the winning percentage increase premonition effect from being mistakenly recognized as being in progress when it is not in progress.

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, after it is determined in the win rate increase transition lottery that the win rate will be increased, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number of games during the win rate increase premonition until it is announced that the win rate will be increased, the game will transition to the CZ state or the AT state at least after the win rate increase premonition has ended.In this case, a CZ or AT preparation display is displayed, indicating that the number of normal games has reached the specified number of games and that preparations are being made to transition to the CZ state or the AT state, so that even if the number of normal games does not reach the specified number of games and transition to the CZ state or the AT state is not made, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful.

In this embodiment, after the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate increase premonition, if a weak chance replay or strong chance replay, which triggers a win rate increase transition lottery, is won before the win rate increase premonition has passed and the transition to the CZ state occurs, a first win rate increase lottery is held in the subsequent CZ state, which increases the probability of winning the second AT lottery, so that the player is not disadvantaged even if the period until the transition to the CZ state is extended due to the win rate increase premonition.

In this embodiment, the specified number of games can be set from a number of different numbers of games, and only when a ceiling number of games (250 in this embodiment) that is the maximum specified number of games is set, if the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, or false win rate increase premonition, the CZ or AT preparation display is displayed, and only when the number of normal games exceeds the maximum value that can be set as the specified number of games but the transition to the CZ state or AT state does not occur can be recognized as to the cause.

In this embodiment, the specified number of games can be set from a number of different game numbers, and the CZ or AT preparation display is displayed only when the maximum ceiling number of games (250 in this embodiment) is set as the specified number of games, when the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, or a false win rate increase premonition. However, regardless of the number of games set as the specified number of games, the CZ or AT preparation display may be displayed when the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, or a false win rate increase premonition. With this configuration, regardless of the number of games set as the specified number of games, the CZ or AT preparation display is displayed when the number of normal games reaches the specified number of games during a win rate increase premonition, win rate increase, or a false win rate increase premonition, so the processing is not complicated.

In this embodiment, by winning the win rate increase transition lottery in the normal state, the win rate is controlled to be increased, which makes it easier to increase the probability of winning the AT lottery in the subsequent CZ state, and by being controlled to increase the win rate, it can be expected that the win rate of the AT lottery in the CZ state will be increased.

In this embodiment, when the number of normal games reaches a specified number while controlled to increase the winning percentage, the game transitions to the CZ state at least after the winning percentage increase has ended. Since the winning percentage increase increases the probability of winning the AT lottery in the CZ state and then transitions to the CZ state, it can be expected that the game will be controlled to the AT state while in the CZ state.

In this embodiment, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate increase, the state will transition to the CZ state or the AT state at least after the win rate increase ends. However, even in this case, a CZ or AT preparation display is displayed, suggesting that the number of normal games has reached the specified number and that preparations are underway to transition to the CZ state or the AT state. This prevents players from becoming distrustful even if the number of normal games reaches the specified number and the state does not transition to the CZ state or the AT state.

In this embodiment, when the number of normal games reaches a specified number in the normal state, the state may be controlled to either the CZ state or the AT state, and when the number of normal games reaches the specified number, the state may be controlled to the AT/CZ premonition state over a plurality of games, and a CZ/AT premonition effect may be performed to indicate whether the state will be controlled to the CZ state or the AT state during that period. In addition, when the number of normal games reaches a specified number in the normal state, the state is controlled to the AT/CZ premonition state from the next game, and a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed, whereas when the number of normal games reaches a specified number during a win rate up premonition, win rate up, or win rate up false premonition, the state is controlled to the AT/CZ premonition state after the win rate up or win rate up false premonition ends, and a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed. Even if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during a win rate up premonition, win rate up, or win rate up false premonition, attention can be drawn to whether the state will transition to the CZ state or the AT state due to the reaching of the specified number of games.

In this embodiment, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate increase premonition, after the win rate increase controlled thereafter ends, the state is controlled to be an AT/CZ premonition, and the CZ/AT premonition performance is performed. After the win rate increase premonition has passed and the win rate increase has been controlled, attention can be drawn to whether the state will transition to a CZ state or an AT state due to the specified number of games being reached.

In this embodiment, if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during the win rate increase false premonition, the game is controlled to the AT/CZ premonition state after the win rate increase false premonition ends, and the CZ/AT premonition performance is performed. Even if the number of normal games reaches the specified number during the win rate increase false premonition, attention can be drawn to whether the game will transition to the CZ state or the AT state due to reaching the specified number of games.

In this embodiment, even if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during a win rate up premonition, and then after the controlled win rate up ends, the state is controlled to AT/CZ premonition and a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed, even if the number of normal games reaches a specified number during a false win rate up premonition, and after the false win rate up premonition ends, the state is controlled to AT/CZ premonition and a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed, a common type of AT/CZ premonition effect is performed. Therefore, whether a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed after the win rate up premonition has passed and the game is controlled to win rate up, or a CZ/AT premonition effect is performed after the false win rate up premonition has passed, a common type of CZ/AT premonition effect is performed, so the content of the CZ/AT premonition effect is easy to understand.

In this embodiment, the presentation mode of the winning percentage increase premonition effect performed during a winning percentage increase premonition or a false winning percentage increase premonition is different from the presentation mode of the CZ/AT premonition effect performed during a CZ/AT premonition state or a false CZ/AT premonition, so it is possible to distinguish whether a winning percentage increase premonition effect is being performed or a CZ/AT premonition effect is being performed.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, a signal counter counts the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state (signal counter value), and a 100 medal signal is output each time the signal counter value in the AT state reaches 100 medals. Therefore, by counting the number of times the 100 medal signal is output, it is possible to externally determine the number of medals increased in the AT state.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the AT state, the machine is first controlled to the first AT state, and after the first AT state ends, the machine is controlled to the second AT state. If the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second AT state, the machine is further controlled to the ED state. When the machine is controlled to the second AT state, the signal counter value counted by the signal counter in the first AT state is taken over and counted, and when the machine is controlled to the ED state, the signal counter value counted by the signal counter in the second AT state is taken over and counted. Therefore, even when the machine is shifted from the first AT state to the second AT state, or from the second AT state to the ED state, the signal counter value counted by the signal counter up to that point is taken over, and by counting the number of 100-piece signals, it is possible to accurately identify the number of medals that have increased since the AT state began.

In this embodiment, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired after the AT state starts and before the AT state ends is approximately 156 medals, and since it is possible to acquire more medals than the 100 medals required for the 100 medal signal to be output in the AT state, it is guaranteed that the 100 medal signal will be output at least once after the AT state starts and before the AT state ends. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the AT state has been controlled by the 100 medal signal.

In this embodiment, after transitioning to the ED state, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired before the ED state ends is approximately 400 medals, and since it is possible to acquire more medals than the 100 medals required until the 100 medals signal is output in the AT state, it is guaranteed that after the ED state begins, the 100 medals signal will be output at least once before the ED state ends.

In this embodiment, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired after the AT state begins and before the ED transition condition is met and the state transitions to the ED state is approximately 1922 medals. Since it is possible to acquire more medals than the 100 medals required for the 100 medal signal to be output in the AT state, it is guaranteed that the 100 medal signal will be output at least once after the AT state begins and before the ED transition condition is met and the state transitions to the ED state.

In this embodiment, the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state counted by the acquired number display counter (acquired number display counter value) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the game in which counting by the acquired number display counter starts is the same as the game in which counting by the signal counter starts. Therefore, after the liquid crystal display 51 starts displaying the acquired number display counter value, a 100-coin signal can be output each time the acquired number display counter value becomes a multiple of 100.

In this embodiment, in the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 displays the net increase in the favorable zone rather than the acquired number display counter value, and when switching from the second AT state presentation to the ED state presentation as the second AT state transitions from the second AT state to the ED state, the acquired number display counter value displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is switched to the net increase in the favorable zone. Up until the second AT state, the acquired number display counter value, which began counting when the AT state began, is displayed, and the display can be switched to the net increase in the favorable zone at a timing that is difficult to notice.

In this embodiment, if the signal counter value after adding the increase in medals to the signal counter value as the game progresses is 100 or more, a 100-coin signal is output and 100 is subtracted from the signal counter value. From the next game onwards, the increase in medals is added to the signal counter value after subtracting 100 medals. This means that the signal counter value never greatly exceeds 100, and it is possible to count the signal counter value for outputting the 100-coin signal every 100 medals using a small storage area (1 byte of storage area in this embodiment).

In this embodiment, when updating the signal counter, the number of medals paid out in the game is added to the signal counter value, and then the number of medals inserted in the game is subtracted. Therefore, even if the signal counter value is less than the number of medals inserted in the game, the signal counter value can be treated as a positive value.

In addition, in this embodiment, when updating the signal counter, the number of medals paid out in the game is added to the signal counter value, and if the result of subtracting the number of medals inserted in the game from the signal counter value is less than 0, the signal counter value is set to 0. Therefore, even if the result of adding the number of medals paid out as a result of the game to the signal counter value and subtracting the number of medals inserted in the game from the signal counter value is less than 0, there is no need to handle negative values.

In this embodiment, when updating the signal counter and when updating the advantageous zone net increase number counter, the number of medals paid out in the game and the number of medals inserted in the game are read separately and the signal counter and advantageous zone net increase number counter are updated, so there is no need to back up the number of medals paid out and the number of medals inserted that are read when updating the signal counter or the advantageous zone net increase number counter, and the processing is not complicated.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas during the selection presentation, suggesting a more advantageous situation than when different characters are displayed in each of the multiple areas, and when the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas during the selection presentation and any area in which the same character is displayed is selected, the same character is displayed in areas among the multiple areas, including the middle area, and only the middle area among the areas in which the same character is displayed is reported as the selection result, so that when the same character is displayed in multiple areas and any area in which the same character is displayed is selected, it is easy to recognize that this is the case.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character (O3, P3) and the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character (Q3, R3) are selected are set higher than the execution rate of the operation instruction performance when a performance pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character (N3), i.e., the rate at which a selection part is executed as a result of a performance operation. This makes it easier for the selection result to be notified as a result of a performance operation when a performance pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character or when a performance pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character is selected than when a performance pattern in which the options in the three areas have all different characters is selected in the selection performance, and thus allows attention to be drawn to a situation in which the same character is displayed in multiple areas.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of the cut-in effect when a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character (O4, P4) and when a presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character (Q4, R4) are set higher than the execution rate of the cut-in effect when a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character is selected (N4), and the cut-in effect is more likely to be executed when a presentation pattern in which the options in two areas have the same character and when a presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas have the same character are selected than when a presentation pattern in which the options in the three areas have different characters is selected in the selection presentation, so that it is possible to draw attention to a situation in which the same character is displayed in multiple areas.

In this embodiment, when an operation instruction presentation is executed in a selection presentation, i.e., when a selection part is executed as a result of a presentation operation, the execution rate (V) of a cut-in presentation is set to be higher than the execution rate (W) of a cut-in presentation when an operation instruction presentation is not executed, i.e., when a selection part is executed as a result of a first stop operation or a third stop operation. Therefore, when a selection result is announced as a result of a presentation operation by the player in a selection presentation, the selection result is more likely to be announced with a cut-in presentation than when the selection result is announced without being triggered by a presentation operation by the player, so that it is possible to draw attention to the situation in which a cut-in presentation is performed in a selection presentation.

In this embodiment, the presentation pattern in which the characters of the options in two of the three areas are the same and the presentation pattern in which the characters of the options in all three areas are the same do not include a presentation pattern in which character A, who is least likely to win the CZ state or AT state, is displayed as an option in multiple areas, and even in a situation in which the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas in the selection presentation suggesting an advantageous situation, the same characters displayed multiple times do not include character A, which suggests the lowest degree of advantageousness, so the player's expectations are not dampened by the displayed characters.

In this embodiment, the presentation pattern in which the characters of the options in two of the three areas are the same and the presentation pattern in which the characters of the options in all of the three areas are the same include a presentation pattern in which character C, which is most likely to win the CZ state or AT state, is displayed as an option in multiple areas, and in a situation in which the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas in the selection presentation suggesting an advantageous situation, the same character displayed multiple times includes character C, which is suggested to be the most advantageous, so the player's expectations can be increased by the displayed characters as well.

In this embodiment, in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in the three regions are all different, character C, which is the most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state among the three types of characters, is displayed in the middle region, followed by character B, which is most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, displayed in the right region, and character A, which is least likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, displayed in the left region. On the other hand, in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in two of the three regions are the same and in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in all three regions are the same, the options with the same character will always include the middle region, which is most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, if the characters of the options in the left, middle, and right regions are all different, and when a character in one region of the options with the same character is announced as a selection result, the character in the middle region is always announced as a selection result. When selecting any of the regions in which the same character is displayed in the selection performance, the middle region in which a character that suggests a relatively high advantage when different characters are displayed is displayed is selected, so that the player can feel that a character that suggests a high advantage has been selected.

In this embodiment, in a presentation pattern in which the characters in two of the options in three areas are the same, and in a presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in all three areas are the same, the options with the same character always include the middle area, which is the most prominent of the left, middle, and right areas, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result. When selecting any area in which the same character is displayed in the selection presentation, the middle area, which is more prominent than the other areas, is selected, so that it is easy to recognize when any area in which the same character is displayed is selected.

In this embodiment, the selection effect selects a character for the CZ/AT suggestion effect that will be executed subsequently, and depending on the character selected as a result of the selection effect, the type of CZ/AT suggestion effect as well as the possibility of winning the CZ state or AT state differs, so it is possible to draw attention to the character selected in the selection effect.

In this embodiment, when character C, which is confirmed to have won the CZ state or the AT state, is selected as the selection result, the presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are the same character and the presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas are the same character are more likely to be selected than when other characters are selected as the selection result, so that it can be expected that a special benefit will be awarded when character C is displayed.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, whether in a presentation pattern in which the characters in two areas are the same in a selection presentation, or in a presentation pattern in which the characters in all three areas are the same, the options resulting in the same character always include the middle area of the left, middle, and right areas, and when any of the areas with the same character are announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result. Therefore, when the same character is displayed in multiple areas, it is easy to recognize that any of the areas displaying the same character has been selected.

In this embodiment, in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in the three regions are all different, character C, which is the most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state among the three types of characters, is displayed in the middle region, followed by character B, which is most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, displayed in the right region, and character A, which is least likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, displayed in the left region. On the other hand, in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in two of the three regions are the same and in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in all three regions are the same, the options with the same character will always include the middle region, which is most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, if the characters of the options in the left, middle, and right regions are all different, and when a character in one region of the options with the same character is announced as a selection result, the character in the middle region is always announced as a selection result. When selecting any of the regions in which the same character is displayed in the selection performance, the middle region in which a character that suggests a relatively high advantage when different characters are displayed is displayed is selected, so that the player can feel that a character that suggests a high advantage has been selected.

In this embodiment, in a presentation pattern in which the characters in two of the options in three areas are the same, and in a presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in all three areas are the same, the options with the same character always include the middle area, which is the most prominent of the left, middle, and right areas, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result. When selecting any area in which the same character is displayed in the selection presentation, the middle area, which is more prominent than the other areas, is selected, so that it is easy to recognize when any area in which the same character is displayed is selected.

In this embodiment, the selection effect selects a character for the CZ/AT suggestion effect that will be executed subsequently, and depending on the character selected as a result of the selection effect, the type of CZ/AT suggestion effect as well as the possibility of winning the CZ state or AT state differs, so it is possible to draw attention to the character selected in the selection effect.

In this embodiment, when character C, which is confirmed to have won the CZ state or the AT state, is selected as the selection result, the presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are the same character and the presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas are the same character are more likely to be selected than when other characters are selected as the selection result, so that it can be expected that a special benefit will be awarded when character C is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the same character is displayed multiple times in multiple areas during a selection presentation, the same character may be displayed in three areas, i.e., in all areas, which may suggest an advantageous situation from a visual perspective.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, whether in a presentation pattern in which the options in multiple areas in the selection presentation are character B, or in a presentation pattern in which the options in multiple areas are character C, the options with the same character always include the middle area of the left area, middle area, and right area, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result. Therefore, when the same character is displayed in multiple areas and any of the areas in which the same character is displayed is selected, it is easy to recognize that fact.

In this embodiment, in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in the three regions are all different, character C, which is the most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state among the three types of characters, is displayed in the middle region, followed by character B, which is most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, displayed in the right region, and character A, which is least likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, displayed in the left region. On the other hand, in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in two of the three regions are the same and in a performance pattern in which the characters of the options in all three regions are the same, the options with the same character will always include the middle region, which is most likely to be in the CZ state or AT state, if the characters of the options in the left, middle, and right regions are all different, and when a character in one region of the options with the same character is announced as a selection result, the character in the middle region is always announced as a selection result. When selecting any of the regions in which the same character is displayed in the selection performance, the middle region in which a character that suggests a relatively high advantage when different characters are displayed is displayed is selected, so that the player can feel that a character that suggests a high advantage has been selected.

In this embodiment, in a presentation pattern in which the characters in two of the options in three areas are the same, and in a presentation pattern in which the characters in the options in all three areas are the same, the options with the same character always include the middle area, which is the most prominent of the left, middle, and right areas, and when a character in one area of the options with the same character is announced as the selection result, the character in the middle area is always announced as the selection result. When selecting any area in which the same character is displayed in the selection presentation, the middle area, which is more prominent than the other areas, is selected, so that it is easy to recognize when any area in which the same character is displayed is selected.

In this embodiment, the selection effect selects a character for the CZ/AT suggestion effect that will be executed subsequently, and depending on the character selected as a result of the selection effect, the type of CZ/AT suggestion effect as well as the possibility of winning the CZ state or AT state differs, so it is possible to draw attention to the character selected in the selection effect.

In this embodiment, when character C, which is confirmed to have won the CZ state or the AT state, is selected as the selection result, the presentation pattern in which the options in two areas are the same character and the presentation pattern in which the options in all three areas are the same character are more likely to be selected than when other characters are selected as the selection result, so that it can be expected that a special benefit will be awarded when character C is displayed.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 performs a setting suggestion lottery when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is selected in the ED state, and executes a setting suggestion performance when the setting suggestion lottery is selected. In addition, in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 performs a setting suggestion lottery when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is selected until a specific period has elapsed after the transition to the ED state, and executes a setting suggestion performance when the setting suggestion lottery is selected, while after the specific period has elapsed, even if a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is selected, the setting suggestion lottery is not performed and the setting suggestion performance is not executed. For this reason, if the period controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the ED state, the setting suggestion performance is not executed after the specific period has elapsed, so that it is possible to prevent the period controlled to the ED state from being intentionally extended for the purpose of granting a privilege.

In this embodiment, the specific period in the first mode is set to 120 games, which is more than the number of games (approximately 103 games) obtained by dividing 400 medals, the number of medals required until the ED state ends, by approximately 3.9 medals, the net increase in medals per game. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly performs a stop operation in an operation mode that suppresses the increase in medals, if the mistake is made once or twice, the ED state will end before the specific period is exceeded, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantage.

In this embodiment, in the first form, the condition that triggers the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the ED state is the winning of a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay, which will trigger control (third additional lottery) to extend the period controlled to the second AT state if the ED transition condition is not met, so it is possible to draw attention to the fact that a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay will be won.

In this embodiment, in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 displays "Net increase in favorable zone number of coins/2400" on the liquid crystal display 51, and is displayed in a manner that suggests both the net increase in favorable zone number and "2400", which will be the number at which the ED state will end. From the suggested net increase in favorable zone number and "2400", which will be the number at which the ED state will end, the user can recognize the period until the ED state ends.

In this embodiment, in the first form, the sub-control unit 91 displays on the liquid crystal display 51 the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state counted by the acquired number display counter (acquired number display counter value) until it is controlled to the ED state, and when switching from the second AT state presentation to the ED state presentation as the second AT state transitions from the second AT state to the ED state, the acquired number display counter value displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is switched to display the net increase in the favorable zone, so that up until the second AT state, the acquired number display counter value, which began counting when the AT state began, is displayed, and the display can be switched to the net increase in the favorable zone at a timing that is difficult to notice.

In this embodiment, in the second form, the sub-control unit 91 executes a specific navigation lottery to determine whether or not to perform a specific navigation that notifies a specific stop order according to the type of normal replay when any type of normal replay is won, executes the specific navigation if the specific navigation lottery is won, the player performs a stop operation in the stop order notified by the specific navigation, and executes a setting suggestion effect if a specific replay combination stops. Also, in the second form, after transitioning to the ED state, until a specific period has elapsed, the sub-control unit 91 executes a setting suggestion effect if a specific navigation lottery is won when any type of normal replay is won, the specific navigation is executed, and the specific replay combination stops, but after the specific period has elapsed, even if any type of normal replay is won, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute a specific navigation lottery, and does not execute a setting suggestion effect regardless of whether a specific replay combination stops. Therefore, if the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the game has been controlled to the ED state, even if any type of normal replay is selected after a specific period of time has elapsed, the specific navigation lottery will not be performed, specific navigation will not be performed, and the combination of specific replays that is the condition for the setting suggestion performance will not be stopped, so it is possible to prevent the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state from being intentionally extended for the purpose of granting a bonus.

In this embodiment, the specific period in the second mode is set to 120 games, which is more than the number of games (approximately 103 games) obtained by dividing 400 medals, which is the number of medals required until the ED state ends, by approximately 3.9 medals, the net increase in medals per game. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly performs a stop operation in a manner that suppresses the increase in medals, if the mistake is made once or twice, the ED state will end before the specific period is exceeded, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantage.

In this embodiment, in the third form, the main control unit 41 ends the ED state when a specific period of time has elapsed after the start of the ED state, not only when the net increase in the number of coins in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 coins after the start of the ED state, but also when the net increase in the number of coins in the favorable zone is 2400 coins or less. Therefore, if the period during which the player is controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the ED state is controlled, the ED state itself will end after the specific period of time has elapsed, so it is possible to prevent the period during which the player is controlled to the ED state from being intentionally extended for the purpose of granting a bonus.

In this embodiment, the specific period in the third mode is set to 120 games, which is more than the number of games (approximately 103 games) obtained by dividing 400 medals, which is the number of medals required until the ED state ends, by approximately 3.9 medals, the net increase in medals per game. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly performs a stop operation in a manner that suppresses the increase in medals, if the mistake is made once or twice, the ED state will end before the specific period is exceeded, preventing the player from suffering any disadvantage.

In this embodiment, in the fourth form, the sub-control unit 91 performs a setting suggestion lottery when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is selected in the ED state, and executes a setting suggestion performance when the setting suggestion lottery is selected. In addition, in the fourth form, when a navigation minor role or a specific minor role is selected and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, that is, an operation mode that suppresses the increase in medals, the sub-control unit 91 controls to a penalty period, and during the penalty period, even if a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is selected, the setting suggestion lottery is not performed and the setting suggestion performance is not executed. Therefore, if the period controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after being controlled to the ED state, the setting suggestion performance will not be executed even if a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is selected, so that it is possible to prevent the period controlled to the ED state from being intentionally extended for the purpose of granting a bonus.

In this embodiment, in the fourth form, when a navigation minor win or specific minor win is won and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, the sub-control unit 91 controls to a penalty period, and during the penalty period, even if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, the setting suggestion lottery is not performed and the setting suggestion presentation is not executed, but if the conditions for canceling the penalty period are subsequently met, a setting suggestion presentation is executed if a strong chance replay or weak chance replay is won, and a setting suggestion presentation is executed if the setting suggestion lottery is won. Therefore, even if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, there is no excessive disadvantage.

In this embodiment, if a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is won during the penalty period in the fourth mode, no setting suggestion lottery is held and no setting suggestion presentation is executed, but the chance replay suggestion presentation is executed. This eliminates the sense of incongruity felt when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is won, even when control is in place to not execute the setting suggestion presentation even when a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay is won.

In this embodiment, in the fourth mode, the condition that triggers the execution of the setting suggestion effect in the ED state is the winning of a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay, which will trigger control (third additional lottery) to extend the period controlled to the second AT state if the ED transition condition is not met, so it is possible to draw attention to the fact that a strong chance replay or a weak chance replay will be won.

In this embodiment, in the fourth mode, the sub-control unit 91 displays "Net increase in number of coins in favorable zone/2400" on the liquid crystal display 51, and is displayed in a manner that suggests both the net increase in number of coins in the favorable zone and "2400", which will be the end of the ED state. From the suggested net increase in number of coins in the favorable zone and "2400", which will be the end of the ED state, the period until the end of the ED state can be recognized.

In this embodiment, in the fourth form, the sub-control unit 91 displays on the liquid crystal display 51 the net increase in the number of medals in the AT state counted by the acquired number display counter (acquired number display counter value) until it is controlled to the ED state, and when switching from the second AT state presentation to the ED state presentation as the second AT state transitions from the second AT state to the ED state, the acquired number display counter value displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is switched to display the net increase in the favorable zone, so that up until the second AT state, the acquired number display counter value, which began counting when the AT state began, is displayed, and the display can be switched to the net increase in the favorable zone at a timing that is difficult to notice.

In this embodiment, in the fifth form, when any type of normal replay is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a specific navigation lottery to determine whether or not to perform a specific navigation that notifies a specific stop order according to the type of normal replay, and if the specific navigation lottery is won, the specific navigation is executed, the player performs a stop operation in the stop order notified by the specific navigation, and if a combination of specific replays is stopped, a setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, in the fifth form, when a navigation minor role or a specific minor role is won and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, that is, an operation mode that suppresses the increase of medals, the sub-control unit 91 controls to a penalty period, and during the penalty period, even if any type of normal replay is won, the specific navigation lottery is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed regardless of whether a combination of specific replays is stopped. Therefore, if the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state is extended by intentionally suppressing the increase in medals after the game has been controlled to the ED state, even if any type of normal replay is selected, the specific navigation lottery will not be performed, specific navigation will not be performed, and the combination of specific replays that is the condition for the setting suggestion performance will not be stopped, so it is possible to prevent the period during which the game is controlled to the ED state from being intentionally extended for the purpose of granting a bonus.

In this embodiment, in the fifth form, when a navigation minor win or specific minor win is won and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, the sub-control unit 91 controls to a penalty period, and during the penalty period, even if any type of normal replay is won, a specific navigation lottery is not performed, and regardless of whether a specific replay combination is stopped, a setting suggestion effect is not executed. However, if the conditions for canceling the penalty period are subsequently met, a specific navigation lottery is executed if any type of normal replay is won, a specific navigation is executed if the specific navigation lottery is won, and a setting suggestion effect is executed if a specific replay combination is stopped. Therefore, even if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode notified by the navigation notification, there is no excessive disadvantage.

Although an embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and it goes without saying that modifications and additions that do not deviate from the spirit of the present invention are also included in the present invention.

In the above embodiment, an example was described in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which the bet amount is set using medals and credits as gaming value, but it may also be applied to a slot machine in which the bet amount is set using gaming balls as gaming value, or a full credit type slot machine in which the bet amount is set using only credits as gaming value.

In addition, in the above embodiment and modified example, the present invention is applied to a slot machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be applied to any gaming machine that performs a specific game, such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a game is played by shooting a gaming ball into a game area, or even a general gaming machine other than a slot machine or a pachinko gaming machine.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 51 Liquid crystal display 56 Performance switch 41 Main control unit 91 Sub control unit

Claims (1)

A variable display unit is provided that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified,
A slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and a prize can be awarded according to the display result,
A reward grant decision means for deciding whether or not to grant a reward;
a bonus award notification means for performing a bonus award notification to notify the player that the bonus will be awarded from the start of a specific game after at least one game has been played since the game in which it has been determined that the bonus will be awarded, until the start of a next game after the end of the specific game ;
Equipped with
After it is determined that the bonus is to be awarded, the presentation control up to the specific game includes a first presentation control and a second presentation control,
the notification control for performing the bonus award notification includes a post-end notification control for performing the bonus award notification after the end of the specific game, and a pre-end notification control for performing the bonus award notification before the end of the specific game,
A slot machine, wherein a ratio of the pre-end notification control being performed among the end notification control and the pre-end notification control differs between a case where the first presentation control is performed and a case where the second presentation control is performed.

Images